Hypermesh tutorials

363
HyperMesh Tutorials Version 3.1 Altair Engineering

description

tutorials for hypermesh....ksfhsjdhfkasdhfkshfkshdfjkhasfjhsjfhskjdhfjkshfksjdhfkshflakfhkasjfhlkasfksjfhklhgkhgksdhgjkhsfjkfjhfkjhkjfhksjhfkashfkhsdfkjhkfjhakfhkla

Transcript of Hypermesh tutorials

Page 1: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh TutorialsVersion 3.1

AltairEngineering

Page 2: Hypermesh tutorials

For technical support, contact us by phone or e-mail:

Country Phone E-mail

United States 248.614.2400 [email protected]

Germany 49.7031.6208.22 [email protected]

India 91.80.665.8871 [email protected]

Israel 972.3.5473651 [email protected]

Italy 39.11.900.77.11 [email protected]

Japan 81.3.5396.1341 [email protected]

Korea 822.573.4152 [email protected]

Scandinavia 46.46.286.2052 [email protected]

United Kingdom 44.1327.810700 [email protected]

Copyright (c) 2000 Altair Engineering, Inc. All rights reserved.

Trademark Acknowledgments:

HyperMesh is a registered trademark of Altair Engineering, Inc.ACIS is a registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC.ACIS Geometric Modeler is a registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC.ACIS Kernel is the registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC.ACIS Parametric Surfaces is the registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC.MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.UNIX is a registered trademark of AT&T.MSC/NASTRAN is a registered trademark of MSC.ABAQUS is a registered trademark of Hibbitt, Karlsson, & Sorensen, Inc.ANSYS is a registered trademark of Ansys, Inc.PATRAN is a registered trademark of MSC.LS-DYNA is a registered trademark of LSTC.MARC is a registered trademark of MARC Analysis Research Corporation.PAMCRASH is a registered trademark of Engineering Systems International.FLUENT is a registered trademark of Fluent, Incorporated.I-DEAS is a registered trademark of Structural Dynamics Corporation.Spaceball is a registered trademark of Spacetec IMC Corporation.

Page 3: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials1

The Location of the HyperMesh Tutorial FilesAll files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Structuring the HyperMesh Database - HM-100In this tutorial, you use the collectors panel to create, update, and assign dictionaries to collectors.You also update existing cards by using the card panel. You start with a HyperMesh database filethat does not have any dictionaries assigned.

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Creating and Editing Dictionaries and Editing Cards

To retrieve the database file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Double-click file = and select HM100-plate.hm30.

4. Click retrieve.

To specify solver:

1. Select the template subpanel.

2. Double-click template file = and select nastran/general.

3. Click return.

Page 4: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering2

To update the element types to the NASTRAN format:

1. Select the 1D page.

2. Select the elem types panel.

3. Click quad4= and select CQUAD4 as the quad element type.

4. Click tria = and select CTRIA3 as the tria element type.

5. Click elems to access the extended entity selection menu.

6. Select all.

7. Click update.

8. Click return to exit the elem types panel.

To update the load types:

1. Select the BCs page.

2. Select the load types panel.

3. Click force = and select FORCE.

4. Click constraint = and select SPC.

5. Click loads to access the extended entity selection menu.

6. Select all.

7. Click update.

8. Click return to exit the load types panel.

To create a material collector:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select mats.

4. Click name = and enter Plate_mat.

5. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.

6. Click card image = and select MAT1.

7. Click create/edit.

A pop-up card is displayed.

Page 5: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials3

8. Click E, click the data entry field, and enter 2e+5.

9. Click NU, click the data entry field, and enter .3.

10. Click return to accept the values.

To create an element collector:

1. Click the switch after collector type and select comps.

2. Click name = and enter Plate.

3. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.

4. Click card image = and select PSHELL.

5. Click material = and select Plate_mat.

6. Click color and select color 8.

7. Click create/edit.

8. Click T, click the data entry field, and enter .25.

9. Click return.

To update a load collector:

1. Select the update subpanel.

2. Click the switch after collector type and select loadcols.

3. Click the highlighted loadcols.

4. Activate the AUTO1 checkbox.

5. Click return.

6. Click color and select color 15.

7. Click update.

8. Activate the color checkbox.

9. Click update.

10. Click return to exit the collectors panel.

Page 6: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering4

To change the name of existing collectors:

1. Select the rename panel.

2. Select the individually subpanel.

3. Click the switch and select loadcols.

4. Click collector = and select AUTO1.

5. Click newname = and enter load1.

6. Click rename.

7. Click return to exit the rename panel.

To move existing elements into a different collector:

1. Select the organize panel.

2. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

3. Click elems and select all.

4. Click destination = and select Plate.

5. Click move.

6. Click return to exit the organize panel.

To view and edit a collector card:

1. Click card in the permanent menu.

2. Click the input collector switch and select comps.

3. Click comps.

4. To select the component, pick one of the elements in the model.

The element temporarily turns white.

5. Click edit.

The card appears and the thickness may be edited.

6. Click return to accept any changes and exit the card.

Page 7: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials5

Introduction to HyperMesh - HM-110This tutorial introduces HyperMesh to new users. The following sections are included:

• The HyperMesh Environment

•Using HyperMesh

Each section contains links to lessons in the HyperMesh User’s Guide On-line Help. These lessonsexplain the HyperMesh interface, terminology, and how to use the HyperMesh panels.

All files referenced in this tutorial are located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/demos/hm.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

The HyperMesh EnvironmentThis section explains the HyperMesh environment. The HyperMesh window has four main menuareas: graphics, the header bar, the main menu, and the permanent menu. The header bar dividesthe screen into two areas. The graphics area of the screen is above the bar and the menu area isbelow the bar. The menu area is further divided into the main menu and the permanent menu. Asecondary menu can be accessed by using keyboard keys. The secondary menu allows you to usepanels that add information necessary to complete the currently active menu panel. The topicsbelow are linked to lessons in the HyperMesh User’s Guide On-line Help.

Starting HyperMesh.

The HyperMesh Environment

The Header Bar

The Main Menu

The Permanent Menu

The Graphics Area

The Secondary Menu

The Mouse

The Keyboard

Page 8: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering6

Using HyperMeshThis section explains how to use a typical HyperMesh panel by description and example. The firsttopic explains how to retrieve a HyperMesh database. Use this file to complete the remainingtutorials. Follow the topics below in the order that they are listed to complete this section.

• Retrieving a HyperMesh Database

• Using Input Collectors

• Picking Entities on the Screen

• Extended Entity Selection

• Using Plane and Vector Collectors

• Viewing Models

• Using the Display Panel

• Graphics Modes

• Setting Global Parameters

• Saving a File

• Printing Screen Images

• Importing and Exporting Data

Page 9: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials7

User Interface Changes - HM-112This tutorial introduces the major changes to the HyperMesh 3.0 graphical user interface (GUI). Itincludes a list of the panels by page and alphabetically.

Similar in structure to HyperMesh 2.1, HyperMesh 3.0 consists of three menu systems: the main,secondary, and permanent menus. Tutorials on the following topics are included:

• The Main Menu

• The Permanent Menu

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

The Main MenuDue to the addition of functions and options, the main menu is expanded from five to seven pages.The page names, Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, and Post, are given by the functionality of thepage panels. Some of the panels on each page contain functionality that applies to multiple pages.These panels appear on all pages applicable to that panel’s functionality. Also, the more frequentlyused panels appear on multiple pages, allowing you to complete a process without changing pages.

To display the common panels between all menu pages:

1. Click Geom through Post.

The common panels in all pages are files, collectors, assemblies, organize, color, rename,and reorder.

2. Click Geom, 1-D, and BCs.

The common panels in these pages are vectors and systems.

3. Click 1-D, 2-D, 3-D.

The common panels, edit element, split, replace, detach, order change, config edit andelem types, are located in the right most column of these pages.

Page 10: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering8

New Panels

HyperMesh 3.0 includes ten new panels:

• geom cleanup (Geom)

• beam xsect, joints, line mesh (1-D)

• elem offset (2-D, 3-D)

• equations, solver, vectors (Geom, 1-D and BCs)

• penetration, convert (Tool)

A summary of the new pages and panels is as follows:

Page Name Description New Panels

Geom Geometry creation and editingfunctions

geom cleanup

vectors

1-D 1-D elements creation and editingfunctions

line mesh

beam xsect

joints

vectors

2-D 2-D elements creation and editingfunctions

elem offset

3-D 3-D elements creation and editingfunctions

elem offset

BCs Loads and boundary creation, outputrequests

equations

solver

vectors

Tool Utility, model checking, and editingfunctions

convert and informationfunctions

penetration

Post Post-Processing functions

The stitch panel, as well as the line from surface edges and split surface edge options in thesurface edit panel, are no longer included in the menu. The new geom cleanup panel now covers

Page 11: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials9

these functions. Please refer to Version 2.1 vs. 3.0 Panel Location for detailed information on thedifferences between panels in HyperMesh 2.1 and 3.0.

files

Panels related to file management are grouped into an integrated files panel. This panel allows youto save and retrieve HyperMesh binary databases, import CAD generated geometry or finite elementmodel information, export CAD geometry or finite element information for specific analysis codes,specify a template file, specify a result file, and execute a HyperMesh command file. Thesesubpanels include the following enhancements:

hm files

• Space between the save and retrieve buttons in order to prevent accidental selection.

• A new option, save in compact.

By default, a file saved in a non-compact format includes surface facets and line/surfacedrawing information. Choosing the save in compact format reduces the size of any saved hmbinary database by suppressing faceted surfaces created during the visual options-shadedsurface toggle under the geom cleanup and automesh panel. Non-compact databases savethese facets in the binary database, allowing an increase in speed during surface shading andautomeshing.

import

• A new option, offset ids.

An offset ids toggle is included which allows you to assign id values to imported bulk data deckentities such as nodes, elems, comps, etc. This improves the assembly process of building fullmodels from many individual files.

• Supports direct CAD import.

For UG, CATIA, STL, HyperMesh versions before 3.0 did not support direct import of UG andCATIA files. Consequently, all CAD data had to be in IGES format before import to HyperMesh.In HyperMesh 3.0, you can import not only geometry data in IGES format but also geometry data

Page 12: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering10

directly from these newly added CAD readers. In addition, HyperMesh 3.0 supports UG version13. When running on a UNIX workstation, the UG reader does not consume a UG license. Touse the UG reader, rlogin to the machine that UG is installed on and run HyperMesh on thismachine in order to use the UG library. If you are using a machine on the same network whereUG is installed and your machine platform is the same as the machine that has UG installed on it,setup the following environment variables in your cshrc file:

UGII_BASE_DIR=/home/apps/eds130

UGII_ROOT_DIR=/home/apps/eds130/bin/

On a PC, a UG license is required to run the UG feinput translator; the UG feinput translator inHyperMesh requires an entire UG 13 environment.

• options for IGES import is renamed.

Since direct CAD import is available in this version, the name is changed to options for CADimport. options for CAD import includes the geometry tolerance and cleanup tolerance. Ageometry tolerance can be set to use file geom tolerance, or geom tol =, a user-specifiedvalue. The cleanup tolerance can be set to use automatic cleanup tol, don’t cleanuptopology, or cleanup tol =, a user-specified value.

export

• Retains the same function as the export data panel in versions before HyperMesh 3.0.

command

• Retains the same function as the command panel in versions before HyperMesh 3.0.

template

• Links with the field in the global panel.

To load a template, you can either choose the template in the file/template sub-panel or in theglobal/template sub-panel.

results

• Links with the field in the global panel.

To load a result file, you can either type the file name in the file/results sub-panel or in theresult file field in the global panel.

Page 13: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials11

The Permanent MenuHyperMesh 3.0 includes the following new additions to the permanent menu: sliding zoom (s),

clockwise rotation , counter-clockwise rotation , back (b), and on-line Help (help). Thefollowing functions are enhanced: window (w), dynamic rotation (r), and user options (options).

The permanent menu.

New Functions

s Slide zoom: zooms the model in and out by dragging the mouse in a vertical direction.

Counterclockwise rotation: rotates the model counterclockwise by the angle set in theoptions panel.

Clockwise rotation: rotates the model clockwise by the angle set in the options panel.

b Back function: returns the model to the initial orientation after a rotation (r) or arcdynamic motion (a).

help Context sensitive on-line Help: accesses the HyperMesh on-line Help.

To use the HyperMesh on-line Help:

1. Click help on the permanent menu.

The table of contents is displayed.

2. Double-click a Help topic.

The Help topic is displayed. How do I’s are listed in green.

3. Click a How do I.

A step by step example procedure appears.

NOTE HyperMesh 3.0 on-line Help is context sensitive. When working within apanel, click help to display the Help topic available for that panel. The mainHelp contents tab appears if you are not within a panel.

Page 14: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering12

Page 15: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials13

w Enhancement in the window manager: two new functions are added to this panel:display legend and display simulation title. These functions allow you to control thecontour plot’s legend and simulation title display. On by default, these functions can beturned off in the post-processing panels.

r Enhancement in the rotation function: the rotation function now allows you to select anode or point as a rotation center using the middle mouse button. If a middle mousebutton is not available, press the alt key and the left mouse button to pick the center.

a Enhancement in the arc dynamic motion function: the arc dynamic motion function nowallows you to select a node or point as a rotation center using the middle mouse button.If a middle mouse button is not available, press the alt key and the left mouse buttonto pick the center.

options Integrates the modeling, graphics, fonts, colors, page name, postscript, andspaceball subpanels.

The Modeling Subpanel

This panel contains most of the entities previously located in the options panel as well as newoptions including the cleanup and geometry tolerance fields, fixed points, and coincident nodepicking.

Page 16: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering14

node tol Used when finding line intersections and determining duplicatenodes. The node tolerance also affects the generation of elements inthe automesher. When quads are created and the side of a quad isless than the node tolerance, HyperMesh tries to create a triaelement instead of a quad. If you create a model with characteristicdimensions less than the node tolerance, reduce the default nodetolerance.

geom tol The geometry tolerance specifies the mathematical accuracy of linesand surfaces in the model. Lines and surfaces are guaranteedgeometrically accurate to within the distance specified by geom tol.The geometry tolerance influences the speed of file i/o and geometricoperations in HyperMesh. Very small geometry tolerances canincrease file read times and increase the length of time required toperform geometric operations. For typical automotive components inmillimeters, a geom tol of 1.000e-04 is usually accurate.

cleanup tol The cleanup tolerance specifies the maximum gap distance allowedbetween two edges or points while performing geometry cleanupoperations. When a cleanup operation is performed, if two entitiesare separated by a distance greater than the cleanup tol at any pointalong their length, they are left unaltered.

fixed points A toggle to turn on or off the display of fixed points.

coincident nodepicking

This is a new option for selecting coincident nodes. If the option ison, coincident nodes are displayed evenly on a circle when themouse moves close.

shrink This option allows you to set shrink element sizes. In HyperMesh3.0, you can specify the size of element by entering a shrink factorbetween 0 and 1.

The graphics Subpanel

This is the new location for the graphics panel. New options are included. In addition, the hiddenlines field and resize box were moved here from the original option panel. Lighting tools for shadedelements are also included in this subpanel. The performance graphic engine now contains bitmapanimation tools, view acceleration tools, and the result color type options.

Page 17: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials15

bitmap animation Allows you to control the way a bitmap animation is created. Threeoptions are given: none, simple and compressed. When none ischosen, the animation is created in the same way as in previousversions. If simple or compressed is chosen, a bitmap is createdbased on the pixel number instead of the number of elements.These two options are recommended for larger models. Use thecompressed option with the simple, or none option if thecomputer swaps disk space during bitmap animation.

view acceleration Allows you to increase the rotation speed while viewing a model.This option is especially useful if you work on a large model with aslow machine. Three options (none, automatic, and Ctrl-Shift)with four different simplification styles (feature line, bounding box,node cloud, and element centroid) are available in this subpanel.For example, if the Ctrl-Shift and feature line options are chosenduring the rotation process (clicking a or s on the permanentmenu), the model changes to a feature line based representationby pressing both the Ctrl and Shift function keys. Whenautomatic and feature line are both chosen, the model is displayedin feature lines whenever it is rotated.

AVI file option Gives you three window sizes in making an AVI file: ¼ screen, 1/9screen, and full screen. You can also choose an 8 or 24 bit colordisplay. When 8 bit is chosen, the color shown in the AVI file isdiscrete contour type. If 24 bit color is chosen, the color displayedin the AVI file is blended contour type.

result color type Allows you to choose either blended or discrete contours whenviewing a contour plot. discrete contours gives a clear definitionof contour boundaries similar to centroidal or zbuffer mode in theprevious version, providing no gradual transition of colors.

fonts Retains the same functions the original font panel plus a newcursor size: function. You can change the cursor size fromstandard to large. This option is especially useful during ademonstration or teleconferencing.

colors Retains the same function as the original background panel withmore options introduced. In this panel, you can customize thecolor of the background, global axis, axis label and thetopological edge. In addition, you can also change the menubackground color. For the UNIX platform, two options are given:dark and light. For PC, you can select classic or windows, thedesktop colors specified in the Windows Control Panel.

Page 18: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering16

page names Retains the same function as the original page name panel.

postscript Retains the same function as the original PostScript panel.

spaceball Retains the same function as the original Spaceball panel.

The display/vis Subpanels

The display and vis subpanels now contain an improved navigation tool to help you when workingwith multiple pages. You can tab through a single page at a time, or go directly to a specified pagenumber. You can also display components by name, id, or both name and id. In the vis panel, thedefault color of the mesh line is black.

Version 2.1 vs. 3.0 Panel LocationThe following tables provide a list of the new page locations relative to the HyperMesh version 2.1page order:

Page 1

Page 2

Page 3

Page 4

Page 5

A second table lists the HyperMesh panels alphabetically and gives the page on which the panel islocated.

Page 19: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials17

Page 1

Panel Name HyperMesh 2.1 Location HyperMesh 3.0 Location

files 1,2,3,4,5 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool,Post

collectors 1,2,3,4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool,Post

organize 1,2,3,4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool,Post

color 1,2,3,4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool,Post

temp nodes 1,2,3,4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool,Post

import data 1,5 Moved to files panel (all sevenpages)

create nodes 1 Geom

node edit 1 Geom

align node 1 Geom

distance 1 Geom

remap 1 Geom

lines 1 Geom

line edit 1 Geom

intersect 1 Geom

section cut 1 Geom

length 1 Geom

circles 1 Geom

tangents 1 Geom

fillets 1 Geom

reparam 1 Geom

reorder 1 Geom

surface edit 1 Geom

surf lines 1 Geom

stitch 1 Merged to geom cleanup

cntl cards 1 BCs

graphics 1 Permanent/option

Page 20: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering18

Page 2

Panel Name HyperMesh 2.1 Location HyperMesh 3.0 Location

config edit 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D

elem types 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D

ruled 2 2-D

spline 2 2-D

drag 2 2-D, 3-D

spin 2 2-D, 3-D

line drag 2 2-D, 3-D

skin 2 2-D

automesh 2 2-D

planes 2 2-D

cones 2 2-D

spheres 2 2-D

torus 2 2-D

edit element 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D

split 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D

order change 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D

replace 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D

detach 2 1-D, 2-D, 3-D

smooth 2 2-D, 3-D

solid map 2 3-D

solid mesh 2 3-D

linear solid 2 3-D

solid offset 2 Renamed to elem offset (2-D, 3-D)

tetramesh 2 3-D

Page 21: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials19

Page 3

Panel Name HyperMesh 2.1 Location HyperMesh 3.0 Location

linear 1d 3 1-D

masses 3 1-D

bars 3 1-D

rods 3 1-D

rigids 3 1-D

welds 3 1-D

springs 3 1-D

gaps 3 1-D

rbe3 3 1-D

translate 3 Tool

rotate 3 Tool

scale 3 Tool

reflect 3 Tool

project 3 Tool

position 3 Tool

permute 3 Tool

check elems 3 Tool

edges 3 Tool

faces 3 Tool

features 3 Tool

normals 3 Tool

dependency 3 Tool

mass 3 Tool

find 3 Tool

mask 3 Tool

delete 3 Tool

rename 3 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool,Post

Page 22: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering20

Page 4

Panel Name HyperMesh 2.1 Location HyperMesh 3.0 Location

systems 4 Geom, 1-D, BCs

load types 4 BCs

constraints 4 BCs

forces 4 BCs

moments 4 BCs

pressures 4 BCs

velocity 4 BCs

accels 4 BCs

temperatures 4 BCs

flux 4 BCs

load steps 4 BCs

interfaces 4 BCs

rigid wall 4 BCs

entity sets 4 BCs

super elems 4 BCs

assemblies 4 Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool,Post

output block 4 BCs

numbers 4 Tool

renumber 4 Tool

summary 4 Tool

count 4 Tool

optimization 4 Renamed to design vars

Page 23: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials21

Page 5

Panel Name HyperMesh 2.1 Location HyperMesh 3.0 Location

import data 1,5 Moved to files panel (all sevenpages)

export data 5 Moved to files panel (all sevenpages)

command 5 Moved to files panel (all sevenpages)

T convert 5 Enhanced and renamed toconvert (Tool)

hidden line 5 Post

contour 5 Post

vector plot 5 Post

titles 5 Post

deformed 5 Post

transient 5 Post

replay 5 Post

apply result 5 Post

xy plotting 5 Post

fd blocks 5 3-D

spaceball 5 Permanent/option

postscript 5 Permanent/option

background 5 Permanent/option

page names 5 Permanent/option

fonts 5 Permanent/option

build menu 5 Tool

Page 24: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering22

Alphabetic Listing of Panels

Panel Name HyperMesh 3.0 Location

accels BCs

align node Geom

apply result Post

assemblies Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post

automesh 2-D

background Permanent/option

bars 1-D

build menu Tool

check elems Tool

circles Geom

cntl cards BCs

collectors Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post

color Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post

command Moved to files panel in all seven pages

cones 2-D

config edit 1-D, 2-D,3-D

constraints BCs

contour Post

count Tool

create nodes Geom

deformed Post

delete Tool

dependency Tool

detach 1-D, 2-D,3-D

distance Geom

drag 2-D, 3-D

edges Tool

edit element 1-D, 2-D,3-D

elem types 1-D, 2-D,3-D

Page 25: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials23

entity sets BCs

export data Moved to files panel in all seven pages

faces Tool

fd blocks 3-D

features Tool

files Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post

fillets Geom

find Tool

flux BCs

fonts Permanent/option

forces BCs

gaps 1-D

hidden line Post

import data Moved to files panel in all seven pages

interfaces BCs

intersect Geom

length Geom

line drag 2-D, 3-D

line edit Geom

linear 1D 1-D

linear solid 3-D

lines Geom

load steps BCs

load types BCs

mask Tool

mass Tool

masses 1-D

moments BCs

node edit Geom

normals Tool

numbers Tool

optimization Renamed to design vars (BCs)

Page 26: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering24

order change 1-D, 2-D,3-D

organize Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post

output block BCs

page names Permanent/option

permute Tool

planes 2-D

position Tool

postscript Permanent/option

pressures BCs

project Tool

rbe3 1-D

reflect Tool

remap Geom

rename Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post

renumber Tool

reorder Geom

reparam Geom

replace 1-D, 2-D,3-D

replay Post

rigid wall BCs

rigids 1-D

rods 1-D

rotate Tool

ruled 2-D

scale Tool

section cut Geom

skin 2-D

smooth 2-D, 3-D

solid map 3-D

solid mesh 3-D

solid offset Renamed to elem offset (2-D, 3-D)

spaceball Permanent/option

Page 27: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials25

spheres 2-D

spin 2-D, 3-D

spline 2-D

split 1-D, 2-D,3-D

springs 1-D

stitch Merged in geom cleanup panel

summary Tool

super elem BCs

surf lines Geom

surface edit Geom

system Geom, 1-D, BCs

T convert Enhanced and renamed to convert (Tool)

tangents Geom

temp nodes Geom, 1-D, 2-D, 3-D, BCs, Tool, Post

temperatures BCs

tetramesh 3-D

titles Post

torus 2-D

transient Post

translate Tool

vector plot Post

velocity BCs

welds 1-D

xy plotting Post

Page 28: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering26

Geometry Creating and Editing - HM-120This tutorial explains how to create lines and surfaces with the geometry creation panels found on theGeom page. The lines, line edit, circles, fillet, and translate panels are included. There are alsoinstructions about using the spline panel to create a surface. The completed geometry of thisexercise is illustrated below.

Completed geometry.

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Creating a Component Collector and Nodes forGeometry

To create a component collector for geometry:

Page 29: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials27

1. Select the collectors panel.

2.Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter geometry.

4. Click the switch under creation method and select no card image.

5. Click color and select color 12.

6. Click create.

7. Click return to exit the collectors panel.

To create nodes:

1. Select the view panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click right.

3. Select the Geom page.

4. Select the create nodes panel.

5. Select the type in subpanel.

6. To create the nodes, enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates found in the following table and clickcreate after entering each set of coordinates.

node X Y Z

1 0 5 0

2 5 5 0

3 5 5 -1

4 7 5 -1

5 5.5 5 0.5

6 2 5 -5

7. Click return to exit the create nodes panel after you finish creating all six nodes.

To display the node IDs:

1. Select the tools page.

2. Select the numbers panel.

3. Click the input collector switch and select nodes.

Page 30: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering28

4. Click nodes to display the extended entity selection menu.

5. Click all.

6. Click on to display all the node IDs.

Positions of the first 6 nodes.

Page 31: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials29

Creating Lines and Fillets

To create lines:

1. Select the Geom page.

2. Select the lines panel.

3. Pick node 1 and node 2.

4. Click create to create a line between nodes 1 and 2.

5. Pick node 3 and node 4.

6. Click create to create a line between nodes 3 and 4.

7. Click return to exit the lines panel.

To create a circle:

1. Select the circles panel.

2. Select the center and radius subpanel.

3. Pick node 6 as the node list at which the circle is to be created.

4. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select N1, N2, N3.

5. Pick any four nodes to define the plane and the base for the axis of rotation.

6. Click radius and enter 5.0.

7. Click create.

8. Click return to exit the circles panel.

To edit lines by splitting at a line:

1. Select the line edit panel.

2. Select the split at line subpanel.

3. Click lines and pick the upper horizontal line.

4. Click cut line and pick the circle.

5. Click split.

Page 32: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering30

To edit lines by splitting at a plane:

1. Select the split at plane subpanel.

2. Click lines and pick the circle.

3. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select x-axis.

4. Click base and pick node 6 to define the base.

5. Click split.

6. Click return to exit the line edit panel.

To create a fillet and delete a line segment:

1. Select the fillets panel.

2. Click radius and enter 1.5.

3. Click the toggle and select trim.

4. Click 1st line. and pick the line between nodes 3 and 4.

5. Click 2nd line and pick the circle.

Two X’s are displayed to allow you to specify the quadrant in which you want the fillet created.

6. Select the upper quadrant for the fillet.

7. Press the F2 function key to access the delete panel.

8. Click the input collector switch and select lines.

9. Pick the line segment attached to node 2.

10. Pick the right half of the circle.

11. Click delete.

12. Click return to exit the delete panel.

13. Click return again to exit the fillets panel.

To combine and smooth lines:

1. Select the line edit panel.

2. Select the combine subpanel.

3. Pick the adjacent lines until all the segments are combined.

4. Select the split at joints subpanel.

Page 33: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials31

5. Pick the line to view the joints in the line.

The joints are displayed as red ‘V’s. Do not split the line.

6. Select the smooth line subpanel.

7. Pick the line.

8. Click smooth.

9. Select the split at joint subpanel.

10. Pick the line.

A message is displayed that states, “The line does not contain any joints.” If there are stilljoints in the line, repeat the smooth function.

11. Click return to exit the line edit panel.

To duplicate and translate lines:

1. Select the translate panel on the tools page.

2. Click the input collector switch and select lines.

3. Pick the line.

4. Click lines again to display the extended entity selection menu.

5. Click duplicate.

6. Click current comp to copy the new line into the current component.

7. Click view.

8. Click iso1.

9. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select y-axis.

10. Click magnitude = and enter 5.0.

11. Click translate -.

12. Click p on the permanent menu.

13. Click return to exit the translate panel.

Page 34: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering32

To create additional lines:

1. Select the Geom page.

2. Select the lines panel.

3. Pick node 1.

4. Click and hold down the left mouse button over the new line until a box cursor appears and liftwhen the line is highlighted.

5. Pick the right end of the line to create a temporary node.

6. Click create.

7. Pick node 4.

8. Click and hold down the left mouse button over the new line until a box cursor appears and liftwhen the line is highlighted.

9. Pick the left end of the line to create a temporary node.

10. Click create.

11. Click return.

To create additional nodes:

1. Select the create nodes panel.

2. Select the type in subpanel.

3. To create the nodes, enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates found in the following table and clickcreate after entering each set of coordinates.

node X Y Z

9 2 5 1

10 2 2 1

11 2 5 0

12 2 2 0

13 2 5 4

4. Click return.

Page 35: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials33

To display the node IDs:

1. Select the Tool page.

2. Select the numbers panel.

3. Click the input collector switch and select nodes.

4. Click nodes to display the extended entity selection menu.

5. Click all.

6. Click return.

To create a circle and an arc:

1. Select the Geom page.

2. Select the circles panel.

3. Select the center & radius subpanel.

4. Pick node 13.

5. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select x-axis.

6. Click radius and enter 3.0.

7. Make sure the toggle is set to circle.

8. Click create.

9. Click the toggle to change to arc.

10. Pick node 13.

11. Click angle = and enter 180.

12. Click radius = and enter 1.0.

13. Click create.

14. Click return to exit the circles panel.

To create a tangent line:

1. Select the tangents panel.

2. Click the input collector switch and select node list.

3. Pick node 10 or 12.

4. Click line.

Page 36: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering34

5. Pick the circle that was created.

6. Click find tangent.

Two potential tangent lines are displayed.

7. Pick the vertical line.

The tangent line is created.

8. Click return to exit the tangents panel.

To edit the lines:

1. Select the line edit panel.

2. Select the split at plane subpanel.

3. Pick the circle as the line to be split.

4. Click the plane and vector switch and select y-axis.

5. Click base and pick node 1.

6. Click split.

7. Pick the left half of the circle.

8. Click the plane and vector switch and select x-axis.

9. Click base and pick node 13.

10. Click split.

11. Click return to exit the line edit panel.

To delete designated line segments:

1. Select the delete panel.

2. Click the input collector switch and select lines.

3. Pick any lines in your model that do not appear in the following illustration.

Page 37: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials35

Rear view of lines created for the hitch model.

4. Click delete.

5. Click return to exit the delete panel.

To create additional lines:

1. Select the Geom page.

2. Select the lines panel.

3. Pick nodes 10 and 12.

4. Click create.

5. Click and hold the left mouse button until the box cursor appears and the center arc ishighlighted.

6. Pick each end of the arc to create a temporary node at each end.

7. Click and hold the left mouse button until the box appears and the outer arc is highlighted.

8. Pick at the end of that arc to place a temporary node there.

9. Use the arrow keys on the permanent menu to rotate the model as necessary to create the linesegments that define the bracket and the remainder of the hitch geometry.

10. Create a line between nodes 9 and 10.

Page 38: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering36

11. Create a line between nodes 11 and 12.

Completed geometry of the hitch model.

12. Click return.

Clearing Temp Nodes and Creating Surfaces

To clear all temp nodes:

1. Select the Geom page.

2. Select the temp nodes panel.

3. Click clear all.

4. Click return to exit the temp nodes panel.

To create a surface from lines:

Page 39: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials37

1. Select the 2D page.

2. Select the spline panel.

3. Pick the four lines on the plate portion of the model.

4. Click the center switch and select surface only.

5. Click spline.

The surface appears as illustrated below. (Only the surface is displayed in this illustration.)

Surface created by using the spline panel.

Page 40: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering38

Geometry Clean Up - HyperMesh-130This lesson introduces the geom cleanup panel. This panel is used to prepare surface geometry formeshing. The gaps, overlaps and misalignments that occur when surfaces are imported intoHyperMesh can prevent the automesher from creating quality meshes. By eliminating misalignmentsand holes and by suppressing the boundaries between adjacent surfaces, you can automesh acrosslarger, more logical regions of the model and improve overall meshing speed and quality.

The following topics are included:

• HyperMesh 3.0 terminology

• Geom cleanup panel features

• Surface edit/filler surface subpanel

• Using the geom cleanup and surface edit panels

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

HyperMesh 3.0 Terminology

New HyperMesh terminology

face A single NURB; the smallest area entity.

Page 41: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials39

surface A collection of one or more adjacent faces whose common edges aresuppressed. HyperMesh meshes on surfaces.

free edge The edge is owned by one surface. In the geom cleanup panel, thedefault color is red.

shared edge The edge is owned by two adjacent surfaces. In the geom cleanuppanel, the default color is green.

suppressed edge The edge is owned, or shared, by two adjacent surfaces. It istransparent to the meshing routine. In the geom cleanup panel, thedefault color is blue.

non-manifold edge The edge is owned by three or more surfaces. In the geom cleanuppanel, the default color is yellow.

fixed point A point associated with a surface. A fixed point is displayed as a smallcircle (o) and is the same color as the surface to which it is associated.The automesher places a finite element node at fixed points.

free point A point in space not associated with a surface. A free point isdisplayed as a small x, (x), and is the same color as the geometrycollector to which it belongs.

Geom Cleanup Panel Features

geom cleanup, edges subpanel menu

cleanup tol = The tolerance used to determine if two surface edges or two surfacevertices should be considered as one.

NOTE:

Values for cleanup tol= can be specified in two locations. The globalvalue for cleanup tol= is in the options/modeling subpanel. Thelocal value for cleanup tol =, which is used for a specific cleanupoperation, is in the geom cleanup panel. Sometimes, operationsperformed by the local cleanup tolerance can be lost by a globalcleanup tolerance overriding it.

An example of this is splitting a surface which was created by utilizinga local cleanup tolerance. Since the surface edit panel uses the globalcleanup tolerance, all of the edges of the new surfaces will bereevaluated by HyperMesh to determine their cleaned up status.

Page 42: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering40

It is recommended that a large value (reasonable with respect to theelement size) be used for the cleanup tol= in the options/modelingsubpanel. For example, for an element edge length of 10, a cleanuptol of 0.1 (10/100) or .05 (10/500) should be used.

visual options Enables user to control display mode of surfaces and edges. Viewsurfaces in wire frame or shaded mode. Display on/off surface edgetypes.

edges subpanel Used to remove gaps and overlaps between surfaces and to mergesurfaces together by modifying the edges of the surfaces.

toggle Convert individual surface edges from one edge type to another withsingle mouse clicks. Free edge ⇒ shared edge ⇔ suppressed edge(red ⇒ green ⇔ dotted blue).

replace Combine two free edges into a shared edge. Free edge ⇒ sharededge (red ⇒ green).

(un)suppress Suppress or unsuppress a number of edges simultaneously. Sharededge ⇔ suppressed edge (green ⇔ dotted blue).

equivalence Convert free edges between adjacent surfaces to shared edges. Freeedge ⇒ shared edge. (red ⇒ green).

geom cleanup, surfaces subpanel

surfaces subpanel Used to delete duplicate surfaces, remove surface holes, organizesurfaces.

find duplicates Find and delete duplicate surfaces. Non-manifold edge ⇒ shared orfree edge (yellow ⇒ green or red).

find holes Find and delete interior surface holes. Free edge ⇒ shared edge orno edge (red ⇒ green or no color).

organize by feature Combine surfaces based on fillets. Shared edge ⇔ suppressededge (green ⇔ dotted blue).

move faces Stitch faces to an existing surface or stitch faces to create a newsurface. Shared edge ⇔ suppressed edge (green ⇔ dotted blue).

Page 43: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials41

geom cleanup, fixed points subpanel

fixed points subpanel Used to add, replace, and suppress fixed points.

add Create fixed points from existing free points or nodes.

replace Delete point to be moved and relocate associated geometry toretained point.

suppress Delete unnecessary fixed points or convert fixed points to free points.

Surface Edit/Filler Surface Subpanelfiller surface Fill in a hole in CAD data by selecting lines, nodes, or points. Similar to the

spline panel, with the exception that points cannot be selected in thespline panel.

NOTE In the surface edit panel, the lines from surface edge subpanel no longerexists. In most panels, surface edges can be used as lines.

Using the Geom Cleanup and Surface Edit PanelsIn this exercise, you use the geom cleanup panel and the filler surface subpanel of the surface editpanel to import surface geometry and prepare it for meshing.

To import surface geometry data file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the import subpanel.

3. Double-click translator =.

4. Select iges, or if you are using a Windows version, select iges.exe.

5. Double-click file name =.

6. Select raw_iges_data.iges.

7. Click import.

Page 44: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering42

8. Click return.

9. Review the iges.msg message file.

In the iges.msg file, there are zero error and zero warning messages.

The message file has an .msg extension and is created in the directory in which HyperMeshwas invoked. After you import any file, it is good practice to review the message file for importerrors.

In the files / import subpanel, use file geom tolerance and use automatic cleanup tol aredefault settings. It is recommended that these settings be used when you import CAD data filesinto HyperMesh for the first time. Experienced users may want to override the default settingsbased on prior knowledge with similar files. These options can be toggled to geom tol = andcleanup tol =. For information about these tolerances and how to use them, see HyperMeshHelp.

The file geometry tolerance for this file is 1.E-06. File geometry tolerance is recorded in igesfiles at the top of the files. For this exercise, the iges file’s top section follows:

HyperMesh Iges Preprocessor S0000001

1H,,1H;,15HHypermesh Model,9Htas2.iges,17HHyperMesh v3.0b10,4Hv1.0,32, G0000001

38,6,308,15,15HHypermesh Model,1.,2,2HYPERMESHM,1,0.,13H980709.084600,1.E-06,, G0000002

5HYPERMESHr. X,1HX,10,0,13H980709.084600; G0000003

116 1 0 0 1 0 0 000000000D0000001

116 0 0 1 0 0 0D0000002

To display surface IDs:

1. Select the Tool page.

2. Select the numbers panel.

3. Click the input collector switch and select surfs.

4. Click surfs and select all on the extended entity selection pop-up window.

5. Click on.

The IDs for the displayed surfaces are displayed.

6. Click return.

Page 45: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials43

To renumber surfaces:

1. Select the Tool page.

2. Select the renumber panel.

3. Click the input collector switch and select surfs.

4. Click surfs and select all on the extended entity selection pop-up window.

5. Click renumber.

The header bar displays the message, “12 surfs ranging from 1 to 12. Completed Through ID:0”.

6. Click return.

7. Click p on the permanent menu.

The new surface IDs are displayed in the graphics area.

Renumbered and displayed surface IDs

To save this work session as a HyperMesh database file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = and enter geomcleanup.hm.

Page 46: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering44

4. Click save.

The header bar displays the message, “The file has been saved.”

5. Click return.

To create non-solver specific component collectors:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps.

3. Click name = and enter top.

4. Click the switch under creation method and select no card image.

5. If there is a name in the field following material =:

- Click material =.

- Click return.

The input field is now clear of that name.

6. Click color.

7. Select Color 5.

8. Click create.

A component collector named top, with a default material collector named top, is created.

9. Repeat steps 3-9 to create three more component collectors named middle1, with Color 4,middle2, with Color 10, and bottom, with Color 9.

10. Click return.

To organize surfaces into component collectors:

1. Select the organize panel.

2. Move surfaces to the bottom component collector:

- Click the input collector switch and select surfs.

- Pick surfaces 10, 11, and 12.

- Click destination =.

- Select bottom.

- Click move.

3. Use the above procedure to move surfaces 3, 6, 8, and 9 to the middle1 component collector.

Page 47: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials45

Surface 3 is hidden beneath surface 8.

4. Use the same procedure to move surfaces 4, 5, and 7 to the middle2 component collector.

5. Use the same procedure to move surfaces 1 and 2 to the top component collector.

6. Click return.

To save this work session:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

geomcleanup.HyperMesh. is displayed after file =.

3. Click save.

A dialog box displays the message “geomcleanup.HyperMesh exists. Overwrite? (y/n)”.

4. Click Yes.

5. Click return.

To change surface edges from free to shared using edges/equivalence subpanel:

1. Select the Geom page.

2. Select the geom cleanup panel.

3. Select the edges subpanel.

4. Click the equivalence radio button.

5. Click surfs and select displayed.

6. Click cleanup tol = and enter .05.

7. Click equivalence.

The message, “All surface edges within tolerance combined,” is displayed in the header bar.Some free surface edges (red) became shared edges (green).

To identify and delete duplicate surfaces:

1. Select the surfaces subpanel.

2. Click the find duplicates radio button.

3. Click faces and select displayed from the extended entity selection pop-up window.

4. Click find.

Page 48: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering46

The message, “One face is duplicated,” is displayed in the header bar.

5. Click delete.

The message, “One face was deleted,” is displayed in the header bar.

To locate problem areas in geometry:

1. Click visual options.

2. Click the toggle to change from wireframe to shaded.

3. Click r on the permanent menu to rotate and view model.

The most obvious problems are a non-manifold edge, a missing surface between surfaces 10and 11, and in the corner where surfaces 1, 3, 5, and 7 meet.

4. Click visual options.

5. Click the toggle to change from shaded to wireframe.

To delete interior surface holes:

1. Measure the hole diameter:

- Press the F4 function key to access the distance panel.

- Select the two nodes subpanel.

- Select any one of the three circles on surface 2:

- Press and hold left mouse button in the graphics area until the cursor changes into awhite square with a dot in the middle of it.

- Pick the circle and release the left mouse button.

- Pick a point on the highlighted circle.

- A green node is placed on the circle.

- Pick a point on the same circle that is across from the green node .

- A blue node is displayed on the circle.

- The number in the input field following distance = is a value less than 3.

- Click return.

- The geom cleanup panel is still displayed.

2. Select the find holes radio button.

3. Click surfs and select displayed from the extended entity selection pop-up window.

4. Click diameter < and enter 3.

5. Click find.

Page 49: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials47

There is a P in the center of the four circles in the graphics area. The smallest diameter foreach of the circles is less than 3.

6. Click P in graphics area in the two circles on surface 2 that aren’t centered on surface 2.

The two Ps are highlighted white.

7. Click delete.

The two circles are deleted from the database.

NOTE HyperMesh finds circular and non-circular shaped holes; the holes don’tneed to be perfect circles. The diameter is treated as a characteristicdimension.

To combine two free edges into a shared edge using surfaces / replace subpanel:

1. Select the edges subpanel.

2. Click replace on left side of menu panel.

3. Pick the surface 10 edge that is parallel and closest to a surface 11 edge.

4. Pick the surface 11 edge that is parallel and closest to the surface 10 edge just selected.

5. Click replace on the right side of the menu panel.

The header bar displays the message, “Gap distance (0.602170) is larger than specifiedtolerance”.

6. Click cleanup tol = and enter 0.61.

7. Repeat steps 3 - 5.

NOTE Do not set the cleanup tolerance to unreasonably high values. New edges aregenerated based on the cleanup tolerance. The cleanup tolerance not onlyaffects the selected entities, but it affects the edges that touch the selectedentities at vertices. The generated edges are accurate only to within the setcleanup tolerance. As a result, if unreasonably high tolerances are used,small gaps can increase in distance up to the set tolerance.

The geom cleanup edges / toggle subpanel can also be used to combine thesurface 10 and 11 edges.

If the shortest distance between two surface edges is greater than theintended element size, do not use this function. Instead, use the surface fillersubpanel on the surface edit panel. Create a filler surface and toggle surfaceedges to suppressed edges accordingly. Another panel that can be used isthe drag geoms subpanel in the drag panel.

Page 50: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering48

To replace a fixed point:

1. Select the fixed points subpanel.

2. Click the replace radio button.

3. Zoom into the corner of surface 9 which borders surface 1 and is on the perimeter of model.

4. Pick the surface 1 corner node.

5. Pick the surface 9 corner node.

6. Click replace.

The surface 9 corner node is replaced with the surface 1 corner node.

To combine free edges to create shared edges using the edges/toggle subpanel:

1. Select the edges subpanel.

2. Select the toggle radio button.

3. Click f on the permanent menu to fit displayed components to the graphics area.

4. Pick surface 3 free edge adjacent to surface 1.

The surface edge becomes green. The surface edge selected in the edges/toggle subpanel isthe retained edge. The other edge, which is found automatically, is the edge which is moved.

5. Pick the surface 9 free edge adjacent to surface 1.

6. Pick the surface 3 free edge adjacent to surface 11.

7. Pick the surface 3 free edge adjacent to surface 5.

8. Pick any other interior free edges.

9. Click visual options.

10. Deactivate the shared edges check box to turn the display of these edges off.

11. Deactivate the fixed points to turn the display of these points off.

Only the free edges that define the model perimeter and the interior holes remain.

12. Click visual options.

13. Activate the shared edges check box to turn display of the edges on.

14. Activate the fixed points check box to turn display of the points on.

Page 51: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials49

To stitch surfaces:

1. Click (un)suppress.

2. Pick the line between surfaces 4 and 6.

3. Pick the line between surfaces 3 and 5.

4. Pick the two linear lines between surfaces 3 and 9.

5. Click suppress.

The selected lines change from shared (green) to suppressed (blue) edges.

6. Click return.

The suppressed surface edges are not displayed in the graphics area. They still exist in themodel and can be toggled back to shared edges in the geom cleanup panel.

NOTE The resulting stitched surface is located in the component collector of thestitched surface having the lowest id. As a result of surfaces 4 and 6 beingstitched together, the stitched surface is located in middle2 componentcollector where surface 4 was originally located. As a result of surfaces 3, 5,and 9 being stitched together, the stitched surface is located in middle1component collector where surface 3 was originally located.

In the geom cleanup panel, HyperMesh treats lines and surface edges thesame. It is recommended that lines be displayed off or masked so thatsurface edges can be selected more easily.

To use the surface edit / filler surface subpanel:

1. Select surface edit.

2. Click filler surface.

3. Zoom into the corner in which surfaces 1, 3, and 7 meet.

4. Click the three lines in the graphics area. Each line is between two fixed points.

The selected lines are highlighted white.

5. Click create.

Question dialog box pops-up stating “Lines appear planar, project to plane? (y/n)”.

6. Click Yes.

A surface was created using the selected three lines.

7. Click return.

8. Click geom cleanup.

Page 52: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering50

9. Click edges.

10. Click toggle.

11. Of the three lines selected in surface edit / filler surface subpanel, pick the line closest to thecenter of the model. The shared (green) edges are suppressed (blue).

Page 53: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials51

The Automeshing Module - HM-135The automeshing module allows you to create meshes interactively on one surface, or even withouta surface present. You can use the subpanels in the automeshing module to automatically meshspecified surfaces by providing an element edge length. You can also interactively select and meshmultiple surfaces. You can adjust the biasing, density, mesh parameters for chordal deviation andtria-transition, and element types before accepting the mesh. After creating the mesh, you can usethe remesh option to remesh the surfaces.

The following exercises are included:

• Automesh Panel Features

• Using the Automeshing Module and the Remesh Function

• Surface Cleanup in the Automesh Panel

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Automesh Panel Features

The automesh panel includes six subpanels: interactive, automatic, mesh params, cleanup, addpoints, and remove points.

Figure 1 - automesh, interactive subpanel menu

interactive subpanel Allows you to mesh surfaces in an interactive mode. You can setsingle or multiple meshing parameters before you create the meshand you can remesh surfaces.

NOTE:

After the initial mesh is created, the automeshing module isdisplayed so that you can adjust and check the mesh before youaccept it.

Once a surface has been prepared for the automeshing module,that information is retained and updated by any changes you maketo the meshing parameters while in the automeshing module. Thenext time the surface is brought into the automeshing module, the

Page 54: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering52

saved data is used as the starting point for the mesh parametersunless the remesh mesh params to: item is selected, in whichcase, the old information is discarded and new values computed.

reset mesh prarms to: Resets the meshing parameters. If you bring a saved surface intothe automeshing module and you select reset mesh prarms to:,the new values are used and the old information is discarded.

elem size = Allows you to specify the element edge size to use to pre-calculatedefault element densities along the edges of the surface.

NOTE:

This tutorial uses the element size = option.

use mesh params Allows you to specify additional meshing controls, such as chordaldeviation meshing or tria transition meshing.

elements to current comp Saves the elements that are created within the current component,regardless of their original component.

elements to surface’s comp Saves the elements that are created within the component to whichthe surface belongs.

remesh Allows you to remesh surfaces with poor element quality. Theexisting mesh is deleted before the surface is remeshed.

highlight surfs HyperMesh scans the displayed surfaces for defined mesh andhighlights those surfaces which failed to create a mesh in the lastattempt.

automatic subpanel Allows you to mesh surfaces automatically. You can set meshingparameters before you create the mesh and you can remeshsurfaces. It has the same features as the interactive subpanel,except that it creates elements on a surface without invoking theautomeshing module.

Figure 2 - automatic, mesh params subpanel menu, tria transition option

Page 55: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials53

Figure 3 - automatic, mesh params subpanel menu, chordal deviation option

mesh params subpanel The mesh params subpanel allows you to set specific meshingparameters before meshing the selected surface(s). You canchoose to use size and biasing, described in tutorial HM-140, orspecify chordal deviation values, described in tutorial HM-141.

Figure 4 - automatic, cleanup subpanel menu

cleanup subpanel Allows you to modify surface topology by splitting a surface fromnode to node, replacing points, and toggling edges.

split surf After selecting two nodes, HyperMesh splits the surface from thelocation of the first node to the location of the second node alongthe normal projection of the straight line between the selectedpoints. The line that HyperMesh creates is temporary. Split surfmirrors the trim with two nodes function on the surface editpanel.

unsplit surf Removes a surface split line from associated surfaces, and deletesthem from the model. You can use this function to removepinholes, for example. Unsplit surf mirrors the remove interiortrim lines function on the surface edit panel.

replace points Deletes the point to be moved and relocates the associatedgeometry to the retained point. Replace points mirrors thereplace points function on the geom cleanup panel.

toggle Converts individual surface edges from one edge type to anotherwith single mouse clicks. For instance, if you use toggle, you canclick once on a free edge that has a neighboring free edge withintolerance to combine the two free edges into a single shared edge.You can also use this function to suppress and unsuppress edges.

Page 56: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering54

Toggle mirrors the toggle function on the geom cleanuppanel/edges subpanel.

add points subpanel Allows you to add fixed points to a surface from existing freepoints or nodes. It mirrors the add points subpanel on the geomcleanup panel.

remove points subpanel Allows you to suppress fixed points by deleting the selected pointsor converting them to free points. It mirrors the suppress pointssubpanel on the geom cleanup panel.

Using the Automeshing Module and the RemeshFunctionIn this tutorial, mesh selected surfaces using the automeshing module, remesh selected surfaces,and delete elements using the remesh option.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the clean_up_geom.hm31 file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theclean_up_geom.hm31 file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To display surface IDs:

1. Select the numbers panel on Tool page.

2. Click the input collector switch and select surfs.

3. Click surfs and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click on.

5. Click return.

Page 57: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials55

Figure 5

To automesh surfaces using the automeshing module:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click component = and select bottom.

3. Click element size = and enter 2.0.

4. Click return.

The element type default setting, quad, is retained.

6. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D or 3-D page.

7. Select the interactive subpanel.

8. Click the lowest toggle and select elements to surface’s comp.

9. Click surfs and pick surfaces 6 and 7 from the model.

10. Click mesh.

HyperMesh goes to the automesh module.

11. Click mesh and review the temporary mesh.

To change the meshing algorithm:

1. Select the algorithm subpanel.

2. Click mesh and review the temporary mesh settings.

Page 58: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering56

NOTE The blue squares on surfaces 6 and 7 indicate that HyperMesh will create themesh using the mapped as rectangle meshing algorithm.

3. Click the switch below meshing algorithm: and select advancing front.

4. Pick the square at the center of surface 6. The square changes to reflect the advancing frontalgorithm.

5. Click mesh.

Notice that the mesh changes

6. Click the switch below meshing algorithm: and select map as triangle.

7. Pick the square at the center of surface 6. The square changes to a triangle to reflect the mapas triangle algorithm.

8. Click mesh.

The header bar displays the following message: “Unable to recognize triangular shape.”

NOTE Apply the map as triangle algorithm to a surface with three sides only. Applythe map as pentagon algorithm to a surface with five sides only.

9. Click the switch below meshing algorithm: and select advancing front.

10. Pick the square at the center of surface 6. The square changes to reflect the advancing frontalgorithm.

11. Click mesh.

To change the smoothing algorithm:

1. Click the switch below smoothing algorithm and select shape corrected.

2. Click set all next to shape corrected to apply the algorithm to the selected surfaces.

3. Click mesh.

Notice how the mesh changes.

4. Click the switch below smoothing algorithm and select no smoothing.

5. Click set all next to no smoothing to apply the algorithm to the selected surfaces.

6. Click mesh.

Notice how the mesh changes.

7. Click the switch below smoothing algorithm and select autodecide.

8. Click the switch below meshing algorithm and select autodecide.

9. Click set all next to autodecide to apply the algorithm to the selected surfaces.

Page 59: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials57

10. Click mesh.

To change the meshing element type:

1. Select the type subpanel.

2. Click the switch under element type: and select mixed:

3. Click set all.

4. Click mesh.

Notice how the mesh changes.

5. Click on the switch under element type: and select quads.

6. Click set all.

7. Click mesh.

Notice how the mesh changes.

To change the mapping parameters:

1. Select the details subpanel.

2. Pick the diamond-shaped icon on surface 6.

3. Click size control.

4. Click mesh.

Notice how the mesh changes.

5. Deactivate size control.

6. Activate skew control.

7. Click mesh.

Notice how the mesh changes.

8. Activate size control.

Both skew control and size control should be activated.

9. Click mesh.

Notice how the mesh changes.

10. Deactivate size control and skew control.

NOTE The mesh generated by either type of element shape is influenced by the sizecontrol and the skew control.

Page 60: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering58

To change the element density on selected edges:

1. Select the density subpanel.

2. Click elem density = and enter 10.

3. Click set edge to.

4. Pick the density numbers on the top and bottom edges of surfaces 6 and 7 (see Figure 6).

The density numbers on those edges change to 10.

5. Click elem density = and enter 3.

6. Click set edge to.

7. Pick the density numbers on the three short edges of surfaces 6 and 7 (see Figure 6).

The density numbers on those edges change to 3.

Figure 6

To change the element biasing on selected edges:

1. Select the biasing subpanel.

2. Click bias intensity = and enter -4.00.

3. Click set edge next to bias intensity.

4. Click the bias intensity numbers on the shared edges between surfaces 4, 6 and 7 (see Figure7).

Page 61: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials59

5. Click mesh.

To check the element quality:

1. Select the checks subpanel.

2. Click the data entry field next to jacobian and enter 0.85.

3. Click jacobian.

Any element on the model that fails to meet the minimum jacobian value is highlighted in red.The minimum jacobian value is displayed in the header bar.

4. Click skew.

The maximum skew angle is displayed in the header bar.

5. Click the return to accept the mesh.

Figure 7

To mesh surface 4:

1. Select the interactive subpanel.

2. Pick surface 4 from the graphics area (see Figure 7).

3. Click mesh.

Review the temporary node and element placements.

Page 62: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering60

NOTE Make sure not to activate reset the mesh parameters to:.The densities will automatically match the previously meshedbottom surfaces and have coincident nodes. The default nodedensities set in the global panel are assigned elsewherearound the surfaces. Activating reset meshing parametersto: causes HyperMesh to use the default mesh parametersand as a result, the meshes will not coincide.

4. Click mesh.

5. Click return.

NOTE The mesh on surfaces 6 and 7 is assigned to the component bottom, andthe elements on surface 4 are assigned to the component middle, the samecomponent of their associate surfaces.

Figure 8

To remesh the meshed surfaces with new parameters:

1. Select the interactive subpanel.

2. Make sure surfs is highlighted and select surfaces 4,6, and 7.

3. Click remesh.

4. Change the node densities as shown in Figure 9.

- Click elem density = and enter the new value.

- Click set edge to.

- Pick the density number on the model.

- Repeat these steps for the remaining new density values.

5. Select the biasing subpanel.

Page 63: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials61

6. Click bias intensity = and enter 0.00.

7. Click the upper set all.

8. Click mesh.

9. Click return to accept the new mesh.

Figure 9

To delete elements using the remesh button:

1. Select the interactive subpanel.

2. Make sure surfs is highlighted and select surfaces 4,6, and 7.

3. Click remesh.

4. Click return.

The elements of the surfaces are deleted. This is a way to delete elements without leaving theautomesh panel.

Surface Cleanup in the Automesh PanelIn this tutorial, use the cleanup, add points, and remove points subpanels to create a mesh.These subpanels allow you to cleanup surfaces without leaving the automesh panel.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

Page 64: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering62

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the clean_up_geom.hm31 file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theclean_up_geom.hm31 file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To display surface IDs:

1. Select the numbers panel on Tool page.

2. Click the input collector switch and select surfs.

3. Click surfs and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click on.

5. Click return.

To remove pinholes from selected surfaces:

1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.

2. Select the modeling subpanel.

3. Click cleanup tol = and enter 0.2.

4. Click return.

5. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

6. Click elem size and enter 2.0.

7. Click return.

8. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D or 3-D page.

9. Select the cleanup subpanel.

10. Click line below unsplit surf:.

Page 65: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials63

11. Pick the pinhole on the circle of surface 1 and the pinhole on the middle circle of surface 3.

The selected pinholes and the trim lines are removed (see Figure 10).

12. Click p to refresh the screen.

To suppress and unsuppress a surface edge:

1. While still in the cleanup subpanel, click line below toggle:.

The cleanup tolerance of 0.200 is automatically displayed in the cleanup tol = data entry field.

2. Pick the green shared edge between surfaces 6 and 7 (see Figure 10).

Surface 7 is not shown in Figure 10 because the shared edge is suppressed.

3. Click p to refresh the screen.

The edge is removed.

Figure 10

To mesh surfaces 4 and 6:

1. Select the interactive subpanel.

2. Make sure surfs is highlighted and select surfaces 4 and 6 (see Figure 10).

3. Click the lower toggle and select elements to surface’s comp.

NOTE The elem size = data entry field displays 2.0, due to the change made in theglobal panel in the previous procedure.

4. Click mesh.

Page 66: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering64

HyperMesh goes to the automeshing module.

5. Click mesh and review the default edge densities.

6. Select the checks subpanel.

7. Click the data entry field after jacobian and enter 0.6.

8. Click jacobian.

The temporary elements with jacobian values less than 0.6 are highlighted. The minimumjacobian value is displayed in the header bar.

9. Select the density subpanel.

10. Set the element densities as shown in Figure 11.

NOTE While in the density subpanel, left click on a density number to increase it,and right click on a density number to decrease it.

11. Repeat steps 6-8.

12. Click return to accept the mesh.

NOTE The newly created elements are placed in the same component collectors astheir associated surfaces.

Figure 11

To add fixed points to surfaces 5 and 8:

1. Select the add points subpanel

2. Pick surface 5 from the graphics area (see Figure 10).

Page 67: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials65

3. Click the switch and select points.

4. Click points and select by comps from the extended entity selection menu.

5. Select Points.

6. Click select.

7. The seven points, displayed as x’s and offset from surface 5, are highlighted.

8. A value of 0.200 is displayed in the cleanup tol = data entry field.

9. Click add to create fixed points on surface 5. These are displayed as o’s.

NOTE Fixed points are associated with the middle component.

To mesh surfaces 5 and 8:

1. Select the interactive subpanel.

2. Make sure surfs is highlighted and pick surfaces 5 and 8.

3. Click mesh.

HyperMesh goes to the density subpanel.

4. Click mesh.

5. Select the checks subpanel to review element quality.

6. Select the density subpanel.

7. Set the element densities as shown in Figure 12.

NOTE While in the density subpanel, left click on a density number to increase it,and right click on a density number to decrease it.

8. Select the biasing subpanel.

9. Right click the biasing number on the edge between surfaces 5 and 8 to set its value to –1.0.

10. Click return to accept the mesh.

Page 68: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering66

Figure 12 - Observe the mesh on surface 5 and how the fixed points affect the placement of the nodes.

To trim the selected surfaces:

1. Select the cleanup subpanel.

2. Click the upper node below split surf:.

3. Pick the shared edge between surfaces 2 and 3.

A node is created at that location.

NOTE A node can be created by clicking anywhere along the edge. You don’t have tohighlight the edge or wait until the cursor becomes a box.

4. After the first node is selected, the lower node below split surf: is highlighted automatically.Click the vertex of surface 3 opposite the node you created in step 3.

As shown in Figure 13, a line connecting these two nodes is used to trim surface 3 at thenormal direction.

5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 to trim surface 1 and surface 2 as shown in Figure 13.

Page 69: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials67

Figure 13

To add fixed points to the edge between surfaces 2 and 3:

1. Select the add points subpanel.

2. Make sure surfs is highlighted and pick surface 2.

3. Click the upper switch and select nodes.

4. While node list is highlighted, pick the edge between surfaces 2 and 3.

5. Wait until the edge is highlighted and the cursor changes from + to a square. Click the leftmouse button to assign a fixed point.

6. Click add.

7. Repeat steps 1 - 6 to add fixed points to the edge between surfaces 9 and 10.

NOTE Place these two nodes so that they break the edge into sections similar to the edgebetween surfaces 2, 5, and 11, and the edge between surface 10, 1, and 4 (seeFigure 13).

To mesh the remaining surfaces:

1. Select the interactive subpanel.

2. Make sure surfs is highlighted and pick surfaces 1, 2, 3, 9, 10, and 11 (see Figure 13).

3. Set the element densities as shown in Figure 14.

NOTE While in the density subpanel, left click on a density number to increase it,and right click on a density number to decrease it.

4. Click mesh and review the mesh.

Page 70: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering68

5. Click return to accept the mesh.

The complete model is displayed in Figure 15.

6. Click return to exit the automesh panel.

Figure 14

Figure 15

Page 71: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials69

To check the element quality:

1. Select the check elems panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the 2-d subpanel.

3. Click assign plot.

4. Select jacobian to review the element quality.

5. Repeat these steps to perform additional element quality checks.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 72: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering70

Automeshing Tria Transition Features - HM-140In this tutorial, create 2-D finite elements to demonstrate the mesh quality produced using the optionson the mesh params subpanel and automeshing module

Perform the exercises in the following order:

• Using the Quads Mapped Mesh Element Type and the Smoothing Controls

• Using the Mixed Mapped Mesh Element Type and the Smoothing Controls

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Using the Quads Mapped Mesh Element Type andthe Smoothing Controls

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the tria_trans.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thetria_trans.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To display the surface IDs:

1. Select the numbers panel on the Tools page.

2. Click the input collector switch and select surfs.

3. Click surfs and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click display

Page 73: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials71

5. Click return to access the main menu.

To select the collector type:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click component = and select quads_size_only.

3. Click return to exit the global panel.

4. Click return to exit the numbers panel.

To set the mesh parameters:

1. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D or 3-D page.

2. Select the mesh params subpanel.

3. Click the leftmost toggle and select use size and biasing.

4. Click elem size = and enter 1.000.

5. Click the switch under mapped mesh elem type and select quads.

6. Activate size control and deactivate skew control, if necessary.

To mesh the surface and create elements:

1. Select the interactive subpanel.

2. Click surfs and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

3. Click mesh.

4. Review the densities and click mesh to preview the elements.

5. Click return.

Note that some of the elements may need to be modified.

• Repeat the steps using the quads_skew_only component and the skew option activated.

• Repeat the steps using the quads_size_skew component and the skew and size optionsactivated.

• Compare the elements created with each of the options:

Page 74: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering72

Quads Size Only

Quads Skew Only

Page 75: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials73

Quads Size and Skew

Using the Mixed Mapped Mesh Element Type andthe Smoothing Controls

To set the collector type:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click component = and select mixed_size_only.

3. Click return to exit the global panel.

To set the mesh parameters:

1. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D or 3-D page.

2. Select the mesh params subpanel.

3. Click the leftmost toggle and select use size and biasing.

4. Click elem size = and enter 1.000.

5. Click the switch under mapped mesh elem type and select mixed.

6. Activate size control and deactivate skew control, if necessary.

Page 76: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering74

To mesh the surface and create elements:

1. Select the interactive subpanel.

2. Click surfs and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

3. Click mesh.

4. Review the densities and click mesh to preview the elements.

5. Click return.

Note that some of the elements may need to be modified.

• Repeat the steps using the mixed_skew_only component and the skew option activated.

• Repeat the steps using the mixed_size_skew component and the skew and size optionsactivated.

• Compare the elements created with each of the options:

Mixed Size Only

Page 77: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials75

Mixed Skew Only

Mixed Size and Skew

Page 78: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering76

Chordal Deviation Meshing - HM-141This tutorial explains the effects of the chordal deviation parameters in the automesh panel. Chordaldeviation is a meshing algorithm that allows HyperMesh to automatically vary node densities andbiasing along curved surface edges to gain a more accurate representation of the surface beingmeshed.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise andcontinue doing the exercises in the following order:

• The Chordal Deviation Options

• Creating a Mesh Based Only on Element Size

• The Maximum Deviation Parameter

• The Maximum Angle Parameter

• The Maximum Element Size Parameter

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

The Chordal Deviation OptionsThe chordal deviation options are located on the mesh params subpanel of the automesh panel. Bydefault, meshing a surface from the interactive and automatic subpanels ignores all settings in themesh params subpanel. To include the mesh parameter settings, set the element size = toggle touse mesh params in the interactive or automatic subpanels of the automesh panel.

The mesh params subpanel is divided into two halves. The left half contains the options for chordaldeviation meshing. The right half contains options for the tria transition meshing algorithm describedin tutorial HM-140-L.

use size and biasing / use chordal deviationtoggle

Used to activate or deactivate chordaldeviation meshing.

use size and biasing arranges the nodesthat lie on the surface edges equidistantfrom each other and at a spacingapproximately equal to the specifiedelement size.

use chordal deviation automaticallyadjusts the surface edge densities and

Page 79: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials77

biasing values based on the specifiedchordal deviation criteria discussed below.

For more information on using theautomesh panel with the use size andbiasing option, please see tutorial HM-135-L

min elem size and max elem size Controls the nodal densities along surfaceedges.

The largest distance between two nodes isthe max elem size.

The smallest distance between two nodesis the min elem size.

The element size parameters takeprecedence over all other chordal deviationparameters.

max deviation Defines the maximum allowable distancebetween an edge of the surface beingmeshed and an element edge.

max angle Defines the maximum allowable anglebetween two element edges.

The chordal deviation parameters are also available in the density subpanel of the automeshingmodule.

Creating a Mesh Based Only on Element SizeIn this tutorial, create a mesh using only element size, not the chordal deviation meshing parameters.

Page 80: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering78

Compare the mesh created in this tutorial with those created in the following tutorials, which use thechordal deviation mesh parameters:

• The Maximum Deviation Parameter

• The Maximum Angle Parameter

• The Maximum Element Size Parameter

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the chordal_dev.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thechordal_dev.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To set the mesh parameters and create the mesh:

1. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the automatic subpanel.

3. Activate reset meshing parameters to:.

4. Click elem size = and enter 15.000.

5. Click the lowest toggle and select elements to surface’s comp.

6. Click surfs and select by comps from the extended entity selection menu.

HyperMesh goes to the display panel.

7. Select use size from the component list.

8. Click select.

9. Click mesh to create the mesh.

10. Click return.

Page 81: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials79

View of the completed mesh for this exercise.

The Maximum Deviation ParameterIn this tutorial, mesh a set of surfaces using the maximum deviation parameter to control the elementdensities and biasing.

To set the chordal deviation parameters:

1. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click the upper toggle and select use mesh params.

HyperMesh now uses the settings in the mesh params subpanel.

3. Select the mesh params subpanel.

4. Click the leftmost toggle and select use chordal deviation.

5. Click min elem size = and enter 1.000.

NOTE You can cycle through the parameter settings by pressingthe TAB key after typing in a value.

6. Set max elem size = to 15.000.

7. Set max deviation = to 0.500.

8. Set max angle = to 90.000 for the maximum angle parameter to be neglected.

To create the mesh:

1. Select the automatic subpanel.

2. Click surfs and select by comps from the extended entity selection menu.

Page 82: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering80

HyperMesh goes to the display panel.

3. Select deviation ctrl from the component list.

4. Click select.

5. Click mesh to create the mesh.

6. Click return to access the automesh subpanel.

View of the completed mesh for this exercise.

The Maximum Angle ParameterIn this tutorial, use the same chordal deviation settings from the previous tutorial, but reduce themaximum angle parameter to compare the effects.

To set the chordal deviation parameters:

1. Select the mesh params subpanel.

2. Click the leftmost toggle and select use chordal deviation.

3. Click min elem size = and enter 1.000

NOTE You can cycle through the parameter settings bypressing the TAB key after typing in a value.

4. Set max elem size = to 15.000

5. Set max deviation = to 0.500

6. Set max angle = to 20.000

To create the mesh:

1. Select the automatic subpanel.

2. Click surfs and select by comps from the extended entity selection menu.

Page 83: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials81

HyperMesh goes to the display panel.

3. Select angle ctrl from the component list.

4. Click select.

5. Click mesh to create the mesh.

View of the completed mesh for this exercise.

The Maximum Element Size ParameterIn this tutorial, use the same chordal deviation parameters from the previous exercise except for themaximum element size parameter. The maximum element size parameter is increased to allow thealgorithm to create larger and fewer elements along planer and less curved surface edges.

To set the chordal deviation parameters:

1. Select the mesh params subpanel.

2. Click the leftmost toggle and select use chordal deviation.

3. Click min elem size = and enter 1.000.

NOTE You can cycle through the parameter settings bypressing the TAB key after typing in a value.

4. Set max elem size = to 30.000.

5. Set max deviation = to 0.500.

6. Set max angle = to 20.000.

To create the mesh:

1. Select the automatic subpanel.

2. Click surfs and select by comps from the extended entity selection menu.

Page 84: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering82

HyperMesh goes to the display panel.

3. Select max size ctrl from the component list.

4. Click select.

5. Click mesh to create the mesh.

View of the completed mesh for this exercise.

Page 85: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials83

Connecting Components - HM - 200This tutorial demonstrates how to connect components using the following panels:

rigids panel Create single and multi-node MPC’s

welds panel Create weld elements

rbe3 panel Create RBE3’s

springs panel Define and create springs

equations panel Constrain a model using equations

The following exercises are included:

• Using rigids and rigidlinks to join elements and components

• Using welds to join element and components

• Using RBE3s and spring elements to model a rubber grommet

• Using equations to simulate a basic contact constraint between components

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Using Rigids and RigidlinksIn this tutorial, use rigids and rigidlinks to join elements and components.

The rigids menu panel allows you to create rigid or rigid link elements. A rigid element is anelement created in a space between two nodes of a model where a rigid connection is desired.

Rigid elements are displayed as a line between two nodes with the letter R written at the centroid ofthe element.

Rigid link elements are displayed as lines between the independent node and the dependentnode(s) with RL displayed at the independent node of the element.

Rigids can translate to RBE2 in NASTRAN or *MPC in ABAQUS.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

Page 86: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering84

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the connect1.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theconnect1.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To create nodes at the center of the holes in parts 1 and 2:

1. Select distance panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the three nodes subpanel.

3. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the large hole in part 1.

4. Click circle center.

A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on part 1.

5. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the large hole in part 2.

6. Click circle center.

A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on part 2.

7. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the small hole in component A.

8. Click circle center

A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on component A.

9. Select any three nodes (N1/N2/N3) on the perimeter of the small hole in component B.

10. Click circle center

A circle is created in the center of the three nodes you selected on component B.

11. Click return to access the main menu.

To change the current component to rigids:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click component = and select rigids.

3. Click return.

Page 87: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials85

To create rigidlinks at the large holes:

1. Select the rigids panel on the 1-D page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch next to dependent: and select multiple nodes.

4. Pick a node at the center of the large hole on part 1 to be the independent node:.

5. Pick nodes on the perimeter of the hole on part 1 to be the dependent node.

6. Click create

7. Pick a node at the center of the large hole on part 2 to be the independent node:.

8. Pick nodes on the perimeter of the hole on part 2 to be the dependent node.

9. Click create

You model should look like the figure below.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 88: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering86

To create a node at the mid-point between the two rigidlinks:

1. Select the distance panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the two nodes subpanel.

3. Select two nodes (N1/N2) at the center of each rigid link.

4. Click nodes between = and enter 1.

5. Click nodes between to create the mid-point node.

6. Click return.

To join the rigidlinks with two rigid elements:

1. Select the rigids panel on the1-D page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch next to dependent: and select single node.

4. Pick the mid-point node created in the previous exercise to be the independent: node:.

5. Pick a node at the center of one of the rigid links on part 1 to be the dependent node.

6. Repeat steps 4 & 5 for the mid-point node and the other rigid link.

Page 89: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials87

Using WeldsIn this tutorial, use welds to join elements and components.

The welds panel allows you to create normally aligned rigid elements between two plate elements.Place weld elements between the sections of your model that are to be welded.

Weld elements are displayed as a line between two nodes with the letter W written at the centroid ofthe element.

Welds can translate to RBAR in NASTRAN or *mpc in ABAQUS.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the connect2.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under

Page 90: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering88

/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theconnect2.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To change the current component to welds:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click component = and select welds.

3. Click return.

To create spot welds joining part1 and part2:

1. Select the welds panel on the 1-D page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click length = and enter 0.000.

4. Click the toggle and select without systems.

5. Deactivate move node.

6. Pick the node on component A and the adjacent node on part 1.

7. Pick the node on component B and the adjacent node on part 2.

8. Click return.

Page 91: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials89

Using RBE3sIn this tutorial, use RBE3s to join elements and components.

The rbe3 panel allows you to create, review, and update RBE3 elements. The update subpanelallows you to edit the connectivity, dofs, and weight for each node of the element.

RBE3 elements are displayed as lines between the dependent node and the independent node(s)with RBE3 displayed at the dependent node of the element.

RBE3’s define the motion at a reference grid point -the dependent node- as the weighted averageof the motions at a set of other grid points -the independent nodes. RBE3 is used in NASTRAN.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

Page 92: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering90

4. Select the connect3.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theconnect3.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To change the current component to rigids:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click component = and select rigids.

3. Click return.

To create RBE3’s at the small holes:

1. Select the rbe3 panel on the 1-D page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Pick a node at the center of the small hole on component A to be the dependent node.

4. Pick nodes on the perimeter of component A to be the independent nodes.

5. Click create.

6. Pick a node at the center of the small hole on component B to be the dependent node.

7. Pick nodes on the perimeter of component B to be the independent nodes.

8. Click create.

9. Click return.

Page 93: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials91

Using SpringsIn this tutorial, use springs to join elements and components.

The springs panel allows you to create spring elements. A spring element is an element created ina space between two nodes of a model where a spring connection is desired. Spring elementsstore a property and a degree of freedom (dof).

Spring elements are displayed as a line between two nodes with the letter K written at the centroidof the element.

Springs can translate to CELAS2 in NASTRAN or *spring in ABAQUS. Springs require a propertydefinition.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

Page 94: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering92

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the connect4.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theconnect4.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To select the NASTRAN analysis template:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click template file = twice.

3. Select the nastran/ directory.

4. Select general.

5. Click return.

To change the current component to springs:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click component = and select springs.

3. Click return.

To create a spring property definition:

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select props.

4. Click name = and enter k1.

5. Click card image = and select PELAS.

6. Click create/edit.

HyperMesh goes to the card image subpanel.

This allows you to enter the NASTRAN card data.

7. Click the data entry field under K1 and enter 1.0 as the spring constant.

Page 95: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials93

8. Click return twice to access to the main menu.

To create a spring element joining the RBE3’s:

1. Select the springs panel on the 1-D page.

2. Click property = and select k1.

3. Select dof2.

4. Click the toggle and select no vector.

The other options are off by default.

5. Pick a node at the center of one of the RBE3 elements.

6. Pick a node at the center of the other RBE3 element.

The spring element is created and represented by a K.

7. Click return.

Page 96: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering94

Using EquationsIn this tutorial, use equations to simulate a basic contact constraint between components.

The equations panel allows you to create, review, and update equations.

Equations are displayed as lines between the dependent node and the independent node(s) withthe letters EQ displayed at the dependent node of the equation.

Equations are used in NASTRAN as MPC or in ABAQUS as *equation.

Place an equation in a load collector.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the connect5.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theconnect5.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To create a load collector:

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols.

4. Click name = and enter the name equations.

5. Click color and select color 12.

6. Click create.

The collector was created.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 97: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials95

To set up the constraint equations:

1. Select the equations panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch and select dof2 as the dependent node degree of freedom.

4. Activate dof2 as the independent node degree of freedom. Deactivate any other degree offreedom options selected.

5. Ensure w has a value of 1.0.

6. Click constant and enter 0.

To create the constraint equations:

1. Pick a node on the edge of part 1 as the dependent node.

2. Pick the corresponding node on part 2 as the independent node.

3. Click create.

4. Repeat this for all nodes along the edge.

Page 98: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering96

Building 1-D Elements - HM-210This tutorial demonstrates how to use the Bar, Line mesh and Features functions available on the 1-D and Tool pages of HyperMesh. These functions allow you to build 1-D elements.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start withthe first exercise and continue doing the exercises in the following order:

• Creating a Bar Element

• Creating 1-D Elements Using the Line Mesh Panel

• Creating 1-D Elements Using the Features Panel

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Creating a Bar ElementThis tutorial explains how to create 1-D bar elements using the bars panel. The bars panel allowsyou to create, review or update 2-noded and 3-noded bar elements.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the 1D_elements.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the1D_elements.hm file.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 99: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials97

The 1D_elements.hm file.

To create a bar element:

1. Select the bars panel on the 1-D page.

2. Select the bar2 subpanel.

3. Click ax = and enter the value 0.

4. Click ay = and enter the value 0.

5. Click az = and enter the value 0.

These are the values for the bar offset.

6. Click property = and select property1.

A property is now assigned to the element.

7. Click pins a = and enter the value 0.

8. Click pins b = and enter the value 0.

These are the values for the degrees of freedom.

9. Click the switch below update and select components from the pop-up menu.

Page 100: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering98

10. After x comp =, enter the value 1.

11. After y comp =, enter the value 1.

12. After z comp =, enter the value 1.

The local y axis is now specified.

13. Click node A and select the lower node in the graphics area.

14. Click node B and select the upper node in the graphics area.

The 2 noded bar element is created.

15. Click return to access the main menu.

Bar 2 element created.

Page 101: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials99

Creating 1-D Elements Using the Line Mesh PanelThis tutorial explains how to create 1-D elements along a line.

To create 1-D elements along a line:

1. Select the line mesh panel on the 1-D page.

2. Click the upper left switch and select lines from the pop-up menu.

3. Select a line on the model.

4. Click the toggle and select segment is whole line.

5. Click the switch after element config: and select rigid from the pop-up menu.

6. Click mesh.

The secondary panel now appears.

7. Click set segment to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.

8. After elem density =, enter the value 20.

9. Click set all.

10. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Rigids created in the line mesh panel.

Page 102: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering100

Creating 1-D Elements Using the Features PanelThis tutorial explains how to create a 1-D element from the features in the model.

To create a 1-D element from the features in the model:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the toggle and select elems.

3. Click none.

4. Select feature_elements.

Only the elements needed for this exercise are displayed.

5. Click return to access the main menu.

6. Select the features panel on the Tool page.

7. Click Comps.

8. Select feature_elements.

9. Click return.

10. After feature angle =, enter the value 30.

11. Select ignore normals.

12. Click the toggle after create: and select plot elements.

13. Click features.

The plot elements are created.

Page 103: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials101

14. Click return.

15. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

16. Click the right toggle and select elems.

17. Click none.

18. Select ^feature.

The plot elements in the green ^feature component are displayed.

Page 104: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering102

Calculating Beam Cross Section - HM-220This tutorial demonstrates how to use the beam xsect panel. The beam cross section panelcalculates the cross sectional plane for a beam element and creates a beam element. It allows youto create a summary file with the results of the calculations performed. The beam cross sectionpanel has two subpanels, offset lines and pick geom. After you use the pick geom subpanel tocalculate the cross-sectional plane, a secondary panel is displayed. The secondary panel allows youto apply the results to the previously created HyperMesh property and create the beam element andsummary file. The offset lines subpanel allows you to create welds on the cross section of theelement. The beam cross-section post-processing subpanel allows you to apply the results to thepreviously created HyperMesh property solver and create the beam element and a summary file. TheCenter of Gravity (purple +) and Shear Center (yellow +) are displayed in the graphics area.

In this tutorial, use the PBEAM card for the Nastran solver as the example to create 2 models; onewith a solid section and another with a shell section. The following procedures are included:

• Creating a property and material collector

• Creating a beam element for a solver

• Creating a summary file to view and save the calculated element properties

• Apply the details to the property card to the beam element

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/. The beam_solid.hm file contains line segments and nodes.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

NOTE You must load a template and create material and property collector before you canassign beam properties. A material collector must also be created to calculate thecorrect characteristics for the bar or beam elements for the summary.

Using the Beam Cross Section Panel

To retrieve the beam_solid.hm file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Double-click file =.

4. Select the beam_solid.hm file.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return.

Page 105: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials103

To load the NASTRAN template in the global template:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Double-click template file = and select nastran/general template.

3. Click return.

To set view angles:

1. Click t on the permanent menu.

2. Click thetax = and enter 10.

3. Click thetay = and enter -30.

4. Click thetaz = and enter 1.

5. Click set angles.

6. Click return.

To create a material collector for the nastran PBEAM element:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select mats.

4. Click name = and enter beam_mat.

5. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.

6. Click card image = and select MAT1.

7. Click create/edit.

8. Click E, click the data entry field under E, and enter 1.

9. Click NU, click the data entry field under NU, and enter 1.

10. Click RHO, click the data entry field under RHO, and enter 1.

11. Click return.

To create a property collector for the beam element:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

Page 106: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering104

3. Click the switch after collector type and select props.

4. Click name = and enter beam_prop.

5. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.

6. Click card image = and select PBEAM .

7. Click material = and select beam_mat.

8. Click create.

9. Click return.

Beam Section Property: Define Section

Creating a Solid Section

To define a section and calculate the cross sectional property for a specified area:

1. Select the beam xsect panel on the 1D page.

2. Select the pick geom subpanel.

3. Click the switch under define using and select lines.

4. Click lines and select displayed.

5. Activate the save elements checkbox.

6. Click the toggle under cross section plane to fit to entities.

7. Click the toggle under plane base node to section centroid.

8. Click the toggle under analysis type to first order.

Page 107: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials105

9. Click solve.

Beam Section Property: Post Process

To assign a FEA solver and update the property card:

1. Click the switch under FEA solver and select nastran/opti-struct.

2. Double-click props.

3. Activate the beam_prop check box.

4. Click select.

5. Click the toggle after prop type to PBEAM.

6. Click update props.

The message, “Property prop1 has a card image loaded for Nastran. Do you wish to clear thecurrent card image and load a new one?” is displayed.

7. Click Yes.

The property called beam_prop has now been updated with the Area, Moment of Inertia, andother calculated values added to the property card.

To create a bar2 element for the defined cross section:

1. Click the toggle under bar2 element to specify end A and end B.

2. Leave end A at the centroid and click pick node under end B:

Page 108: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering106

3. Pick node 145.

4. Click the toggle under elem orientation to none.

5. Click create elem.

The element is displayed with the label BAR2.

To create a summary file:

1. Click the toggle in the lower left to summary file.

2. Click summary file and enter BEAM_summary.

3. Activate the display check box.

4. Click summary.

The summary information is displayed on the screen. An example of a summary file is shown atthe end of this tutorial.

5. Click the left mouse button to advance to the next page of the summary file.

6. Click return.

To review the card:

1. Click card on the permanent menu.

2. Click the input collector switch and select props.

3. Click props.

4. Activate the beam_prop check box.

5. Click select.

6. Click edit.

The card image is displayed. The values can be edited by clicking in the field you wish to editand entering the new values.

7. Click return.

8. Click return.

Page 109: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials107

Beam Section Property: Post Process (with bar element)

To clear this session of HyperMesh:

1. Select the delete panel on the Tool page.

2. Click delete model.

A pop-up window displays the message, “Do you wish to delete the current model?”

3. Click Yes.

The HyperMesh session is cleared for the next steps.

4. Click return.

Page 110: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering108

Creating a Thin-walled Section

Offset Geometry for Thin-walled Section

To retrieve the xsect_welds.hm file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Double-click file =.

4. Select the xsect_welds.hm file.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return.

To define the cross section of an element that has a weld:

1. Select the beam xsect panel on the 1D page.

2. Select the offset lines subpanel.

3. Pick the two yellow lines.

4. Click nominal t = and enter 0.5.

5. Click the toggle next to cross section plane to fit to entities.

6. Click the toggle next to plane base node to section centroid.

7. Click define.

8. Click graphical toggles.

Page 111: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials109

Geographical Toggles for thickness of thin-walled section

NOTE: You can click the graphical representation of the thickness arrow to togglethe side of the line where the thickness is to be applied. Each click changesthe location of the thickness of the line from top to bottom or centered. In thiscase, place the thickness over the center of the lines.

9. Select the weld pts subpanel.

10. Click lines and pick both yellow lines.

11. Click distance = and enter 1.0.

12. Click diameter = and enter 0.25.

13. Click draw size = and enter 2.

14. Click add weld pt.

15. Pick the leftmost pointer on the top line.

16. Click solve.

The Center of Gravity (purple +) and Shear Center (Yellow +) are displayed.

To assign an FEA solver and update the property card:

1. Click the switch under FEA solver and select nastran.

2. Double-click props.

3. Activate the weld_prop checkbox .

4. Click select.

5. Click the toggle after prop type to PBEAM.

Page 112: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering110

6. Click update props.

The message, “Property prop1 has a card image loaded for Nastran. Do you wish to clear thecurrent card image and load a new one?” is displayed.

7. Click Yes.

The weld_prop property has been updated with the Area, Moment of Inertia, and othercalculated values.

8. Click return.

Create Weld Point

To update the property and view the card in the card previewer:

1. Select card on the permanent menu.

2. Click the input collector switch and select props.

3. Click props.

4. Activate the weld_prop checkbox.

5. Click select.

6. Click edit.

The NASTRAN PBEAM card image is displayed. The values can be edited by clicking the fieldyou want to edit and entering the desired values.

7. Click return to exit the card panel.

8. Click return to exit the beam xsect panel.

Page 113: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials111

Beam Cross-Section Property Computation ResultsCross-Section Plane Data

• Global base coordinate (0.000000, -1.136364, 0.000000)

• Global normal vector (0.000000, 0.000000, -1.000000)

Area

• A = 220

Centroid

wrt. User Axes YC = 0

ZC = 0

wrt. Global Axes global Xc = 0

global Yc = -1.13636

global Zc = 0

Principal Moments of Intertia

• IYYP = 16549.2

• IZZP = 3693.33

Angle Of Principal Bending Axes

• ANGB = 0

Bending

Moments Of Inertia wrt. User Axes IYY = 16549.2

IZZ = 3693.33

IYZ = 0

Moments Of Inertia wrt. Centroid IYYC = 16549.2

IZZC = 3693.33

IYZC = 0

Elastic Section Modulus EMYP = 369.333

EMZP = 1259.8

Plastic Section Modulus PMYP = 680

PMZP = 1715.04

Radius Of Gyration RG = 4.0973

Maximum Coordinate Extension YMAXC =13.1364

ZMAXC = 10

Page 114: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering112

Shear

Shear Center wrt. Centroid YS = 1.01881

ZS = 0

wrt. Global Axes Xsc = 0

Ysc = -2.15517

Zsc = 0

Shear Deformation Coefficients AYY = 1.75931

AZZ = 1.84491

AYZ = 0

Principal Shear Coefficients AYYP = 1.75931

AZZP = 1.84491

Angle Of Principal Shear Axes ANGS = 0

Shear Stiffness Factors KYY = 0.568404

KZZ = 0.542033

KYZ = 0

Torsion

Torsional Constant J = 1754.85

Elastic Torsion Modulus EMT = 221.591

Plastic Torsion Modulus PMT = 744.425

Warping Constant wrt. Shear Center GAMMA = 362403

Torsion/Shear Coefficients AXY = 0

AXZ = 0

Results in Terms of NASTRAN Input

$PBAR

PID MID Area I1 I2 J NSM

PBAR 1 1 219.999

16549.2

3693.33

1754.84

0.00000

$ C1 C2 D1 D2 E1 E2 F1 F2

0.00000 0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

$ K1 K2 I12

0.56840 0.54203

0.00000

Page 115: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials113

$ PID MID Area I1 I2 I12 J NSM

PBEAM

1 1 219.999

16549.2

3693.33

0.00000

1754.84

0.00000

$ C1 C2 D1 D2 E1 E2 F1 F2

0.00000 0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

$ K1 K2 S1 S2 NSI(A) NSI(B) CW(A) CW(B)

0.56840 0.54203

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

362403.

0.00000

$ M1(A) M2(A) M1(B) M2(B) N1(A) N2(A) N1(B) N2(B)

0.00000 0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

-1.0188

0.00000

0.00000

0.00000

Page 116: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering114

Building Surfaces and Shell Meshes - HM-300LThis tutorial demonstrates how to build surfaces and shell meshes using the panels listed below.These panels are located on the 2-D page.

ruled panel Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh from nodes or linesthat are unconnected.

spline panel Allows you to create a 3-D mesh and/or surface with lines.

skin panel Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh skin across a set oflines.

drag panel Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh by dragging nodes,lines, or elements.

line drag panel Allows you to create a surface and/or mesh by dragging nodes,lines, or elements along a line.

The following exercises are included:

• Creating Surfaces and Meshes Using the ruled panel.

• Creating Surfaces and Meshes Using the spline panel

• Creating Surfaces and Meshes Using the skin panel.

• Dragging Lines to Create Surfaces and/or Shell Meshes

• Dragging Nodes to Create Surfaces and/or Shell Meshes

• Creating Surfaces and/or Shell Meshes with Lines

• Creating Surfaces and/or Shell Meshes with Nodes

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Creating Surfaces and Meshes using the ruled panelIn this tutorial, use the ruled panel to create surfaces and shell meshes from a combination of nodes,lines, and/or line segments.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directory

Page 117: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials115

names are followed by a slash.

4. Select the simple300.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thesimple300.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The simple300.hm file

To build a ruled surface using lines:

1. Select the ruled panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click the upper input collector switch and select lines.

3. Pick line L1 from the graphics area.

4. Click the lower input collector switch and select lines.

5. Pick line L2 from the graphics area.

6. Click the rightmost switch and select mesh, keep surf.

Page 118: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering116

7. Click create.

8. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edgeof the new surface.

- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left mousebutton increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.

9. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panel withoutsaving the surface that you created.

- If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.

10. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the followingmesh and surface options in step 6:

- mesh, dele surf

- mesh, w/o surf

- surface only

11. Click return to access the main menu.

To build a ruled surface using nodes:

1. Select the ruled panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click the upper input collector switch and select nodes.

3. Pick nodes 1 and 4 in the graphics area.

4. Click the lower input collector switch and select nodes.

5. Pick nodes 17 and 19 in the graphics area.

6. Click the rightmost collector switch and select mesh, keep surf.

7. Click create.

8. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edgeof the new surface.

- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left mousebutton increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.

9. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panelwithout saving the surface that you created.

Page 119: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials117

- If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.

10. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the followingmesh and surface options in step 6:

- mesh, dele surf

- mesh, w/o surf

- surface only

11. For practice, select a combination of node list and line list entity selection methods to createsurfaces or meshes.

Creating Surfaces and Meshes using the splinepanelIn this tutorial, use the spline panel to create 3-D surfaces and meshes from a combination of nodesand lines.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the simple300.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thesimple300.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 120: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering118

The simple300.hm file.

To build two surface construction lines:

1. Select the lines panel on the Geom page.

2. Pick nodes 1 and 17 in the graphics area.

3. Select the rightmost switch and select linear.

4. Click create.

The line is displayed.

5. Pick nodes 4 and 20.

6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create a new line.

7. Click return.

To build a spline surface using lines:

1. Select the spline panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click the leftmost switch and select lines.

3. Pick lines L1, L2, and the lines that you created in the previous procedure.

Page 121: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials119

4. Click the rightmost switch and select mesh, keep surf.

5. Click the toggle and select do not smooth lines.

6. Click create.

7. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edgeof the new surface.

- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left mousebutton increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.

8. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panelwithout saving the surface that you created.

- If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.

9. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the followingmesh and surface options in step 4:

- mesh, dele surf

- mesh, w/o surf

- surface only

To build a spline surface using nodes:

1. Select the spline panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click the leftmost switch and select nodes.

NOTE Spline surfaces are created with either three or four nodes selected.This does not mean, however, that the spline surface must be planar.

3. Pick nodes 19, 2, 25, and 27 on the model, in that order.

4. Click the rightmost switch and select mesh, keep surf.

5. Click the toggle and select do not smooth lines.

6. Click create.

7. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edgeof the new surface.

- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left mouse

Page 122: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering120

button increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.

8. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panelwithout saving the surface that you created.

- If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.

9. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the followingmesh and surface options in step 4:

- mesh, dele surf

- mesh, w/o surf

- surface only

Creating Surfaces and Meshes using the skin panelIn this tutorial, use the skin panel to create a skin surface and mesh from a set of lines.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the skin.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the skin.hmfile.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 123: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials121

The skin.hm file.

To create a skin surface with lines:

1. Select the skin panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click line list.

3. Pick lines L1, L2, L3, and L4 in that order.

4. Select the rightmost switch and select mesh, keep surf.

5. Click create.

6. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edgeof the new surface.

- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left mousebutton increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.

7. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panel withoutsaving the surface that you created.

- If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.

8. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the followingand surface options in step 4:

- mesh, dele surf

- mesh, w/o surf

- surface only

Page 124: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering122

Dragging Lines to Create Surfaces and ShellMeshesThe drag panel allows you to take selected entities, either lines or nodes, and drag them along aspecified vector to create a shell mesh and/or a surface along that vector direction.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the dragdemo.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thedragdemo.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The dragdemo.hm file.

Page 125: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials123

To create a surface by dragging lines:

1. Select the drag panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the drag geoms subpanel.

3. Click the upper input collector switch and select lines.

4. Pick line L1.

5. Click the lower right switch and select mesh, keep surf.

6. To specify the direction along which to drag the line, use the plane and vector collector switch, orselect three nodes. The three nodes specify a plane, and the drag direction is assumedperpendicular to this plane.

7. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select z-axis as the direction along which to dragthe nodes.

8. Click the distance toggle switch and select distance =.

9. Click distance = and enter 50.0.

10. Click drag+.The line is dragged 50 positive units in the z-axis direction and the new surface is displayed.

11. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edgeof the new surface.

- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left mousebutton increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.

12. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panel withoutsaving the surface that you created.

- If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.

13. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the followingmesh and surface options in step 5:

- mesh, dele surf

- mesh, w/o surf

- surface only

Page 126: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering124

Dragging Nodes to Create Surfaces and ShellMeshesThe drag panel allows you to take selected entities, either lines or nodes, and drag them along aspecified vector to create a shell mesh and/or a surface along that vector direction.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the simple300.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thesimple300.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The simple300.hm file.

Page 127: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials125

To build a surface using node selections:

1. Select the drag panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the drag geoms subpanel.

3. Click the upper input collector switch and select nodes.

4. Pick nodes 9, 10, and 11 in the graphics area.

5. Click the lower right switch and select mesh, keep surf.

6. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select y-axis as the direction along which to dragthe nodes.

7. Click the distance toggle switch and select distance =.

8. Click distance = and enter 50.0.

9. Click drag-.

The new surface is displayed.

10. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edgeof the new surface.

- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left mousebutton increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.

11. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panelwithout saving the surface that you created.

- If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.

12. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the followingmesh and surface options in step 5:

- mesh, dele surf

- mesh, w/o surf

- surface only

Page 128: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering126

Creating Surfaces and Shell Meshes with LinesIn this tutorial, use the line drag panel to create surfaces and shell meshes by dragging a line, linesegments, or nodes along a selected curve path.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the dragdemo.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thedragdemo.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The dragdemo.hm file.

Page 129: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials127

To create a surface by dragging lines:

1. Select the line drag panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the drag geoms subpanel.

3. Click the input collector switch after drag: and select lines.

4. Pick line L1.

5. Click the lower right switch and select mesh, keep surf.

6. Click the toggle and select use default vector.

7. Click line list to the right of along: and pick line L2 in the graphics area as the guide line alongwhich to drag the entities.

8. Click drag.

The new surface is displayed.

9. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edgeof the new surface.

- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left mousebutton increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.

10. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panelwithout saving the surface that you created.

- f the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.

11. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the followingmesh and surface options in step 5:

- mesh, dele surf

- mesh, w/o surf

- surface only

Page 130: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering128

Creating Surfaces and Shell Meshes with NodesIn this tutorial, use the line drag panel to create surfaces and shell meshes from a combination ofnode picks and a 3-D line, which serves as the path curve along which the nodes are dragged.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the skin.hm file located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the skin.hmfile.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The skin.hm file.

Page 131: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials129

To create temporary nodes:

1. Select the create nodes panel on the Geom page.

2. Select the on line subpanel.

3. Pick line L1 in the graphics area.

4. Click the data entry field after number of nodes = and enter 6.

5. Click the switch after bias style: and select linear.

6. Click the data entry field after bias intensity = and enter 0.

7. Click create.

Six evenly spaced nodes are displayed in the graphics area.

8. Click return.

To create a mesh of shell elements using the line drag panel:

1. Select the line drag panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the drag geoms subpanel.

3. Click the input collector switch after drag: and select nodes.

4. Select the six nodes (in order from 1–6) created previously along line L1.

5. Click line list to the right of along: and pick line L2 in the graphics area as the guide line alongwhich to drag the entities.

6. Click the lower right switch and select mesh, keep surf.

7. Click the toggle and select use default vector.

Page 132: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering130

8. Click drag.

The new surface is displayed in the graphics area.

9. HyperMesh goes to the automesh module panel. Nodal densities are displayed on each edgeof the new surface.

- To change the density, click the number in the graphics area with the mouse button. The left mousebutton increases the density; the right mouse button decreases it.

10. Click mesh to create a shell mesh of elements on the new surface.

- To undo, click reject immediately after you create the mesh.

- If the surface is unacceptable, click abort to exit immediately the automeshing module panelwithout saving the surface that you created.

- If the surface and mesh are acceptable, click return. HyperMesh returns to the ruled panel.

11. To create other types of surfaces and meshes, repeat these steps and select one of the followingmesh and surface options in step 6:

- mesh, dele surf

- mesh, w/o surf

- surface only

Page 133: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials131

Building Solid Elements - HM-400This tutorial demonstrates how to build solid elements using the following panels:

• The solid map panel

• The elem offset panel

• The drag panel

• The line drag panel

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Solid Map PanelIn this tutorial, use the solid map panel to create solid elements by first extruding an existing 2-Delement mesh, then mapping the extruded mesh into a volume.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the solidmap.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thesolidmap.hm file.

6. Click cleanup topology.

7. Click retrieve.

8. Click return to exit the files panel.

Page 134: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering132

The solidmap.hm file

To create a new collector for the new solid elements:

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps as the type of collector you want tocreate.

4. Click name = and type sldelems (or a name of your choice).

Collector names are limited to 32 characters.

5. Click color to display the pop-up menu of color choices.

6. Select Color 5.

7. Click create.

8. Click return.

To create solid elements using the solid map panel:

1. Select the solid map panel on the 3-D page.

2. Select the both subpanel.

3. Click the input collector switch by source: and select surfs.

This specifies the source surface.

4. Pick surface A in the graphics area.

The surface is highlighted when selected.

Page 135: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials133

5. Click the input collector switch by end: and select surfs.

This specifies the end surface.

6. Pick surface B in the graphics area.

The surface is highlighted when selected.

7. Click the input collector switch by along: and select surfs.

The input collector displays surf list. This specifies the “along” surface.

8. Pick the three surfaces between the source and end surfaces in the graphics area.

Hold the left mouse button and move the cursor in the graphics area to highlight the surfaces.Release the left mouse button to select the highlighted surface.

9. Click surf list.

The “along” surfaces you selected are highlighted in sequence.

10. Click elems and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.

This specifies which elements to drag. The plate elements on surface A are displayed.

11. Click density = and enter 10 to indicate the number of rows of elements you want to createbetween source surface A and end surface B.

12. Click mesh.

The header bar gives status messages as the elements are generated.

When finished, the model contains ten rows of elements that begin at surface A and end atsurface B. The new solid elements follow the contour of the specified “along” surfaces. Thehole in the center of the original shell element mesh is propagated through the solid elementmesh.

13. Click return to exit the solid map panel.

To view the model in hidden line mode:

1. Press the function key F1 to access the hidden line menu, or select the hidden line panel on thePost page.

2. Click fill plot.

Page 136: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering134

The model in hidden line mode

3. Click return.

Elem Offset PanelIn this tutorial, use the elem offset panel to create solid elements by extruding an existing 2-D meshin the direction of the element normals.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the bumper.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thebumper.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

Page 137: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials135

The bumper.hm file

To change the performance graphics mode and view the model in hidden line mode:

1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.

2. Select the graphics subpanel.

3. Click the toggle and select performance.

4. Select the vis panel on the permanent menu.

5. Click the Hidden Line with Mesh Lines icon, .

6. Click all.

7. Click return twice to access the main menu.

To orient the element normals in the same direction:

1. Select the normals panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the elements subpanel.

3. Click the switch and select comps.

4. Click comps again and select comp 1 and comp 2 as the component collectors.

Page 138: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering136

5. Click return.

6. Click size = and enter 10 for the size of the normal vectors to be displayed.

7. Click display normals to show the element normals’ directions.

8. Click elem under orientation:.

9. From the graphics area, pick any element in the cyan colored collector comp1.

10. Click adjust normals.

The normals of the elements in the green collector, comp2, are the same as the elements incyan collector, comp1.

11. Click return to access the main menu.

To create solid elements using the elem offset panel:

1. Select the elem offset panel on the 3-D page of the main menu.

2. Click elems and select by config from the extended entity selection menu.

3. Click config = and select quad4 from the pop-up menu.

4. Click select entities.

5. Click elems and select by config from the extended entity selection menu.

6. Click config = and select tria3 from the pop-up menu.

7. Click select entities.

This selection method can be used to select elements of more than one type in a model.

1. Click density = and enter 3 for the number of rows of elements you want to create.

2. Click thickness = and enter 5 for the total thickness of the elements you want to create.

3. Click offset to create the solid elements.

4. Click z on the permanent menu and use the left mouse button to draw a circle around the rightside of the bumper.

Page 139: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials137

Model with solid elements created from faces of shell elements

NOTE The solid elements that have been created are extruded from the faces of theoriginal shell elements. In some cases, the shell elements may have beenmodeled at the mid-plane of the solid elements you want to create.

5. Click reject to reject the solid elements.

6. Click offset = and enter –2.5 as the starting position for the solid elements.

7. Click offset to create the solid elements.

Page 140: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering138

Model created with solid elements from shell elements shown at mid-plane

NOTE The solid elements that have been created start at adistance of 2.5 behind the shell elements with a total solidthickness of 5.

8. Click return to exit the elem offset panel.

Drag PanelIn this tutorial, use the drag panel to create solid elements with a linear bias by extruding an existingmesh of 2-D elements.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the drag.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

Page 141: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials139

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the drag.hmfile.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

The drag.hm file.

To create solid elements using the drag panel:

1. Select the drag panel on the 3-D page.

2. Select the drag elems subpanel.

3. Click elems and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select N1, N2, N3.

5. Click N1.

6. Pick any three nodes on the model.

This defines a plane and normal vector from which HyperMesh creates the solid elements.

7. Click the toggle and select distance =.

8. Click distance = and enter 100 for the total thickness of elements you want to create.

9. Click on drag = and enter 20 for the number of rows of solid elements you want to create.

Page 142: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering140

10. Click bias intensity = and enter 10 for the intensity.

11. Click drag -.

The solid elements are created.

12. Click return to exit the drag panel.

To view the model in hidden line mode:

1. Press the function key F1 to access the hidden line menu, or select the hidden line panel on thePost page.

2. Click fill plot.

3. Click z on the permanent menu and use the left mouse button to draw a circle around the rightside of the bumper.

NOTE Each row of elements gets progressively thicker due to the linear bias.

Experiment with the exponential and bellcurve bias styles.

4. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 143: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials141

Line Drag PanelIn this tutorial, use the line drag panel to create solid elements by extruding an existing mesh of 2-Delements along more than one non-linear line.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the linedrag.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thelinedrag.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

The linedrag.hm file.

Page 144: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering142

To change the performance graphics mode and view the model in hidden line mode:

1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.

2. Select the graphics subpanel.

3. Click the toggle and select performance.

4. Select the vis panel on the permanent menu.

5. Click the Hidden Line with Mesh Lines icon, .

6. Click all.

7. Click return twice to access the main menu.

To create the solid elements using the line drag panel:

1. Select the line drag panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the drag elems subpanel.

3. Click elems and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.

This selects the shell elements that define the section of the solid mesh you want to create.

4. Click line list next to along:.

5. Pick the two lines that define the helical spring from the graphics area.

Hold the left mouse button and move the cursor in the graphics area to highlight each line.Release the left mouse button to select each highlighted line.

6. Click on drag = and enter 200 for the number of rows of solid elements you want to create.

7. Click drag to create the mesh.

The header bar displays status messages as the elements are created.

Page 145: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials143

Model with solid elements created

8. Click reject to reject the solid mesh that was created.

9. Practice by clicking the use default vector toggle and selecting specify vector. Also, define abias style: and a value for bias intensity =

NOTE If you select specify vector, use the plane and vector collector to selectthe orientation vector.

For more information on the biasing options, refer to the Element Biasingsection in the Automatic Mesh Generation chapter of the User’s Manual.

10. Click drag to create a new solid mesh based on the changes made.

11. Click return to accept the new solid mesh and access the main menu.

Page 146: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering144

Using the Automatic Tetramesher - HM-450This tutorial demonstrates how to use the tetra mesh, tetra remesh and CFD mesh subpanelsavailable in the tetramesh panel.

The following functions allow you create a solid model of tetrahedral elements from an enclosedvolume tria surface mesh:

floatable Matches the node locations of the tetras with the trias, butthe connectivity of those tetras may be modified to producea better mesh. Normally, this results in some tetra facesgoing across tria diagonals.

fixed Matches the node locations of the tetras with the trias. Itguarantees the connectivity of the tetras with the trias. Usethis option whenever you need to match other componentsto the resulting tetra mesh.

prism trias Selects the tria elements that define the surface from whichthe layers of high aspect ratio are used when creating aCFD mesh.

normal trias Selects the tria elements that do not need high aspect ratiotetra layers. This performs the same function as thenormal trias option in the standard tetramesh panel.

boundary layer prisms Specifies the layer thickness parameters as appropriate forthe Reynold’s number for the fluid being studied.

init thickness: thickness of first layer of high aspect ratiotetras

init growth rate: growth rate for high aspect ratio tetralayers

acceleration: growth acceleration for high aspect ratio tetralayer

NOTE Prism growth parameters: If d is the initialthickness, r is the initial growth rate, and a isthe growth acceleration, then the thicknessesof the successive prism layers is d, d*r, d*r2*a,d*r3*a2, d*r4*a3,...

structured isotropic prisms Uses the local element size for the initial thickness and avalue of 1.0 for the growth rate and acceleration. You canuse structured isotropic prism layers in any situation whereordered layers of tetras are required near the surface. Themesher uses as many layers as possible of isotropicelements until the elements in the next layer are ofunacceptable quality, and then it switches to the normalmeshing algorithm.

generate mesh normally Applies in most applications, and uses the standard tetra-meshing algorithm as in previous versions of HyperMesh.This option is available in each tetramesh subpanel.

Page 147: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials145

optimize meshing speed Uses an algorithm which optimizes meshing speed. Usethis option if element quality considerations are lessimportant than mesh generation time. This option isavailable in each tetramesh subpanel.

optimize meshing quality Directs the tetramesher to spend more time trying togenerate the best shaped elements. It employs thevolumetric ratio, or CFD skew, measurement for ratingpotential tetras. Use this option if your solver is sensitive toelement quality. This option is available in each tetrameshsubpanel.

growth rate The growth rate for normal trias and after prism elementsare complete.

initial layers The number of initial layers for normal trias after prismelements are complete.

growth options Various growth options can be specified in order to controlthe tradeoff between the number of tetras generated andthe element quality. Options that can be selected arestandard, aggressive, gradual, interpolate and usercontrolled. The standard option is suggested for mostconditions. For a detailed explanation of these parameters,please consult the HyperMesh on-line Help.

The following tutorials are included:

• Tetramesh a Volume

•Tetra Remesh a Selected Group of Elements

• Tetramesh Using the CFD Algorithm

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

The Tetramesh PanelThe tetramesh panel allows you to fill an enclosed volume with first or second order tetrahedralelements. A region is considered enclosed if it is entirely bounded by a mesh of tria elements whereeach tria has material on one side and open space on the other.

You can specify trias as fixed and floatable. Under most circumstances, select only those trias thatmust match up to another pre-existing mesh as fixed. You can also specify various growth options inorder to control the tradeoff between the number of tetras generated and the average and minimumelement qualities. Higher, more aggressive growth rates produce fewer elements, but they may be ofpoor quality.

Page 148: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering146

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the tetmesh.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thetetmesh.hm file.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

tetmesh.hm model file.

To tetra mesh the enclosed volume:

1. Select the tetramesh panel on the 3-D page.

2. Select the tetra mesh subpanel.

3. Click the switch below floatable trias: and select comps from the pop-up menu.

Page 149: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials147

4. Pick an element that belongs to the component.

or

Click the upper comps and select trias, then click return.

5. Click the switch below growth option: and select standard from the pop-up menu.

6. Click the lower right switch and select generate mesh normally from the pop-up menu.

7. Click tetmesh.

8. Click return to access the main menu.

NOTE The header bar displays status messages as the elements are created. Theright mouse button allows you to cancel the tetramesh operation.

NOTE Elements that cause the tetramesher to fail are highlighted and placed into abuffer for later retrieval. See The Tetra Remesh Panel for a description onretrieving and isolating these elements for inspection.

The Tetra Remesh PanelThe tetra remesh subpanel allows you to regenerate the mesh for a single volume of tetras. Thetetras you select form a single connected region. This command allows you to locally remesh anarea where poor quality tetras may exist. Look for a concentration of bad elements and use acombination of the mask and find panels to locate a collection of neighboring tetras to remesh.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the tetremesh.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thetetremesh.hm file.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 150: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering148

To identify tetra elements with poor quality:

1. Select the check elems panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the 3-D subpanel.

3. After tetra collapse, enter the value 0.10.

4. Click tetra collapse.

5. Once elements are highlighted, click save failed.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

NOTE The header bar relays the message that the minimum tetra collapse is 0.00,a tetra element that does not occupy a volume. The save failed operationplaces the bad elements that show a tetra collapse value less than what isspecified in a buffer, allowing the elements to be retrieved later.

tetremesh.hm model file.

To isolate the save failed elements:

1. Select the mask panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the mask subpanel.

3. Click the switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.

4. Click elems and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.

The save failed elements become highlighted.

Page 151: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials149

5. Click elems and select reverse from the extended entity selection window.

All the elements excluding the save failed become highlighted.

6. Click mask .

Only the save failed elements should remain.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To find elements attached to the displayed element:

1. Select the find panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the find attached subpanel.

3. Click the upper switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.

4. Click the lower switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.

5. Select the displayed element.

6. Click find.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To tetra remesh the selected group of elements:

1. Select the tetramesh panel on the 3-D page.

2. Select the tetra remesh subpanel.

3. Click elems and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.

Elements to be remeshed become highlighted.

4. Click remesh.

5. Click return to access the main menu.

To unmask previously masked elements:

1. Select the mask panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the mask subpanel.

3. Click unmask all.

4. Click return to access the main menu.

To review the newly created elements:

Page 152: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering150

1. Select the check elems panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the 3-D subpanel.

3. Click tetra collapse.

The minimum tetra collapse is now 0.20.

4. Continue to tetra remesh until element quality is satisfactory.

5. Click return to access the main menu

CFD MeshThe accuracy with which a solution is resolved is directly related to the number of elements in regionsof high solution gradient. In most CFD applications, this is near the surface of the flow and is calledboundary layer behavior. Consequently, the mesh is generated so that it clusters many elementsnear the surface. The CFD mesh subpanel utilizes floatable trias which allow you to pack manylayers of high aspect ratio tetras against a surface in order to resolve boundary layer behavior in thesolution.

Using the normal algorithm, if you pack many elements against the surface, many of the elements willhave some very obtuse face angles, which often cause problems for solvers. For the prism layeralgorithm, the tetra elements are generated in prism-shaped groups of three or more in such a way toprevent large angles from appearing. Arbitrarily, many of these high aspect ratio tetras can belayered against the surface as needed in order to resolve the boundary layer behavior. They aregenerated with very thin initial layers, growing in thickness with an accelerating growth rate until thelayer thickness is the same as the width of the prism, at which point the tetramesher switches to itsnormal algorithm to efficiently fill the remaining volume.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the sphere.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thesphere.hm file.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 153: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials151

To switch to performance graphics and display a model in hidden line mode:

1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.

2. Select the graphics subpanel.

3. Click the toggle after engine: and select performance.

4. Click return to access the main menu.

5. Select the vis panel on the permanent menu.

6. Click the hidden line with mesh lines icon, , the third icon from the left below the all button.

7. Click all.

8. Click mesh color and select Color 0 from the pop-up menu.

9. Click return to access the main menu.

To create a new component for the tetra elements:

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter tetras.

4. Click color and select a color for the new collector from the pop-up window.

5. Click create.

6. Select return to access the main menu.

NOTE For this exercise we have created a component collector that does notreference a solver template. For more information on how to associate asolver to a collector, see the HyperMesh on-line Help.

To tetramesh using the CFD meshing subpanel:

1. Select the tetramesh panel on the 3-D page.

2. Select the CFD mesh subpanel.

3. Click the switch below prism trias: and select comps from the pop-up menu.

4. Pick an element that belongs to the component.

or

Click the upper comps and select trias, then click return.

Page 154: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering152

5. Click the toggle and select boundary layer prisms.

6. Click the lower right switch and select generate mesh normally from the pop-up menu.

7. Click init thickness = and enter the value 0.5.

8. Scroll through the other options using the TAB key and assign the following values:

init growth rate = 1.100

acceleration = 1.100

growth rate = 1.250

initial layers = 0.750

9. Click tetmesh.

10. Select return to access the main menu.

Volume enclosed tria mesh.

To use the mask panel to view the interior of the tetramesh model:

1. Select the view panel on the permanent menu.

2. Select top.

3. Select the mask panel on the Tool page.

4. Select the mask subpanel.

5. Click the switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.

Page 155: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials153

6. Click elems and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.

7. Click interior.

8. Using the left mouse button to define the corners of your window, select elements from the righthalf of the model.

9. Click select entities.

10. Click mask .

11. Select the vis panel on the permanent menu.

12. Click the hidden line with mesh lines icon, , the third icon from the left below the all button.

13. Click all.

14. Select the view panel on the permanent menu.

15. Select rear.

Section cut of tetra mesh volume using CFD mesh.

Page 156: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering154

Splitting and Combining Shell Elements - HM-500LThis tutorial demonstrates how to split and combine shell elements using the split and edit elementpanels. Splitting and combining elements allows you to refine or coarsen meshes and correctelement-to-element connectivity.

The following exercises are included:

• Splitting shell elements using the edit element panel

• Splitting shell elements using the split panel

• Combining shell elements using the edit element panel

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Splitting Shell Elements using the edit elementpanelIn this tutorial, use the edit element panel to split shell elements.

The split sub-panel allows you to split an arbitrary number of shell elements by drawing a split lineover them. The splitting algorithm used depends on how the split line crosses the element.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the el_edit_split.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theel_edit_split.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

Page 157: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials155

To split shell elements using the edit element panel:

1. Select the edit element panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the split subpanel.

3. Click the switch and select elems.

4. Click split.

5. Use the mouse to build a line in the graphics area that intersects the elements A - E.

To draw the line:

- Position the cursor on element A, pressing the left mouse button.

- Draw the line from element A to element B and release the left mouse button.

- Repeat these steps to draw a line from elements B to C, C to D, and D to E.

This specifies the elements you want to split.

Page 158: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering156

6. Click split elements.

7. You can use the split panel to split elements in the following ways:

- Across opposite edges, creating 2 quads

- Along adjacent edges, creating 3 quads

Page 159: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials157

- From an edge to a vertex , creating one tria and one quad

- From one vertex to its diagonally opposite vertex, creating 2 trias.

NOTE Tria elements can be split in a similar manner.

In this tutorial, an element is split when the split line crosses two of itsedges. This feature is useful if you have several ‘layers’ of duplicated shellelements that need to be split.

If you select elements before drawing the split line, only the selectedelements are split. If you do not select elements before drawing the splitline, the splitting algorithm operates on all elements displayed.

If you split elements on a surface that has been automeshed, new nodescreated by the split are automatically projected to the surface.

Maintain proper connectivity (without internal free edges) after splitting theelements.

Splitting Shell Elements using the split panelIn this tutorial, use the split panel to split shell elements. The split panel allows you to split elementssimultaneously using one of four algorithms.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directory namesare followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the split.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the split.hmfile.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

Page 160: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering158

To split shell elements using the split panel:

1. Select the split panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the plate elements subpanel.

3. Pick elements A - E.

4. Click the switch and select divide quads.

Page 161: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials159

5. Click split.

The selected quads are split into trias.

NOTE The methods available for splitting plate elements include:

split all sides - splits an element at the midpoint of its sides

divide quads - divides all the quad element s into trias and allows you to fixquads with severe warpage

midpoint - to trias - partitions an element by creating a node at its centroidand forms trias using the element’s vertices

midpoint - to quads partitions an element by creating a node at its centroidand forms quads using the midpoints of each of its sides

When you split elements whose nodes are associated to a surface, the newnodes created are also on the surface. To associate a node to a surface, usethe node edit panel.

Maintain proper connectivity (without any internal free edges) after combiningelements.

Page 162: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering160

Combining Shell Elements using the edit elementpanelIn this tutorial, combine shell elements using the edit element panel.

The combine subpanel on the edit element panel allows you to combine an arbitrary number of shellelements simultaneously or a set number of shell elements automatically. Both methods arecontrolled by the tolerance = and angle = functions. When elements are being combined,HyperMesh requires the nodes attached to the elements to be planar within a user-specifiedtolerance. The tolerance may be changed with the menu item tolerance =.

When elements are being combined, HyperMesh performs node condensation on mid-side nodes.Nodes are considered to be mid-side nodes if the angle between any three nodes in the set of nodesbeing condensed is greater than a user-specified angle. The angle may be changed with the menuitem angle =.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directory namesare followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the el_edit_comb.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theel_edit_comb.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

Page 163: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials161

To combine an arbitrary number of elements:

1. Select the edit element panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the combine subpanel.

3. Click tolerance = and enter 0.010.

4. Click angle = and enter 150.00.

5. Click auto comb = and enter 1000.

6. Pick elements A, B, C, and D.

7. Click combine.

8. HyperMesh displays the following error message: The elements selected are not planar for thegiven tolerance.

9. Click tolerance = and enter 0.1.

10. Click combine.

The selected elements become one element.

Page 164: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering162

To automatically combine a set number of elements:

The auto comb = function allows you to combine elements automatically.

1. Click auto comb = and enter 2.

2. Pick elements E and F.

HyperMesh combines the elements automatically.

NOTE Setting tolerance = too high may create warped elements, and/or the deviation from thegeometry may increase.

Maintain proper connectivity (without any internal free edges) after combining elements.

Page 165: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials163

Editing Elements by Moving Nodes - HM-510LThis tutorial demonstrates how to edit elements by moving the nodes attached to them. This tutorialuses the distance, align node, replace, and node edit panels.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise andcontinue doing the exercises in the following order:

The following exercises are included:

• Changing the Distance Between Nodes

• Replacing Nodes

• Aligning Nodes

• Placing Nodes

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Changing the Distance Between NodesThe distance panel allows you to determine the distance between two nodes or the angle betweenthree nodes, or to change distances or angles. In this tutorial, use the distance panel to change thedistance between nodes.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the node_editing.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thenode_editing.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

Page 166: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering164

To change the distance between nodes:

1. Select the distance panel on the Geom page.

2. Select the two nodes subpanel.

3. Pick node 1 on the model while N1 is highlighted.

4. Pick node 2 on the model while N2 is highlighted.

The total distance between the nodes is displayed as 39.500 in the distance = field.

NOTE The total distance is further broken down into the components’ distancesand displayed in x dist =, y dist =, and z dist =. These distances areupdated when the total distance is changed. You can also edit thesedistances individually, upon which the total distance and othercomponent distances change.

5. Click the data entry field after distance = and enter 27.0.

N2 moves along the N1 - N2 vector to reflect this change.

6. Click return to exit the distance panel.

Undo

• Click reject.

Page 167: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials165

Replacing NodesThe replace panel allows nodes to be replaced with other nodes. Use this function if you want tomanually equivalence two nodes.

Use the node_editing.hm file used in the previous tutorial, Changing the Distance BetweenNodes:

To replace a node:

1. Select the replace panel on the Tool page.

2. Click equivalence if it is not already selected.

3. Click z on the permanent menu and draw a circle around nodes A, B, C, and D.

4. Click the upper node list and pick node A on the model.

5. Click the lower node list and pick node B on the model.

Node A moves to the position of node B.

Page 168: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering166

6. Click at mid-point.

7. Click the upper node list and pick node C on the model.

8. Click the lower node list and pick node D on the model.

The nodes move to the midpoint of their original locations.

9. Click return to exit the replace panel.

Undo

• Click the right mouse button immediately after the nodes have been replaced, or click reject.

NOTE The nodes are equivalenced if you select equivalence. You may movenodes only if equivalence is not selected.

You can select the second node at any location on a line or along asurface. In this case, select the node on the line or surface by firsthighlighting the line or surface, then selecting the preferred location onthe line or surface.

Aligning NodesThe align node panel allows you to project nodes to an imaginary line passing through two nodes.Nodes being projected do not have to lie between the two nodes selected to form the line. The nodesare projected to the imaginary line along its normal. This function is mostly used on planar mesheswhere straightened mesh lines improve mesh quality.

Use the node_editing.hm file used in the previous tutorials, Changing the Distance BetweenNodes and Replacing Nodes.

To align a node:

Page 169: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials167

1. Select the align node panel on the Geom page.

2. Select b on the permanent menu to go back to the previous view of the model.

3. Click the upper node list and pick node 3 on the model.

4. Click the lower node list and pick node 4 on the model.

Nodes 3 and 4 define the vector along which other nodes selected are aligned.

5. Pick nodes 5, 6, and 7 on the model.

Each node moves to a position along the vector defined by the nodes 3 and 4.

6. Click return to exit the align nodes panel.

Undo

• Click the right mouse button immediately after selecting a node.

Page 170: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering168

Placing NodesThe node edit panel allows you to associate nodes to a surface, move nodes along a surface, orplace a node at a point on a surface. In this tutorial, use the place node option on the node editpanel. This option is used to select a node and reposition it to any location on a selected surface.

Use the node_editing.hm file used in the previous tutorials, Changing the Distance BetweenNodes, Replacing Nodes, and Aligning Nodes.

To place a node:

1. Select the node edit panel on the Geom page.

2. Select the place node subpanel.

3. Click z on the permanent menu and draw a circle around E and X in the graphics area.

4. While destination surf is highlighted, pick the surface to which to associate the node byselecting on or near one of the surface lines.

5. While node to place is highlighted, pick node E.

6. Pick a point near X in the graphics area.

The node is moved to that location on the surface.

Page 171: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials169

Undo

• Click the right mouse button or click reject.

NOTE You can check elements while using the place node on the node editpanel. To do this, press the F10 key, check the element(s) in question,and click return to access the node edit panel.

Placing a node on a surface associates the node to the surface. Once anode has been placed on a surface, another node can be placed on thesame surface by picking the new node and then the surface (you do nothave to reselect the surface).

Page 172: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering170

Model Checking - HM-520This tutorial demonstrates how to use the check elements and edges panels. The check elementspanel verifies the quality of elements. The edges panel allows you to find free edges andequivalences nodes on edges.

Some of the terms used when checking element quality include:

Warpage The amount by which an element or element face (in the case of solidelements) deviates from being planar. Warpage of up to five degrees isgenerally acceptable.

Aspect Ratio The ratio of the element's longest edge to its shortest edge. Aspect ratiosshould be less than 5:1 in most cases.

Skew The angle between the lines that join opposite midsides.

Jacobian A measure of the deviation of an element from an ideally shaped element.The Jacobian value ranges from 0.0 to 1.0, where 1.0 represents a perfectlyshaped element. However, Jacobian values of 0.7 and above are generallyacceptable.

The following exercises are included:

• Testing Elements for Warpage

• Testing Elements for Aspect Ratio

• Finding Duplicate Nodes and Free Edges in the Model

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Testing Elements for WarpageIn this tutorial, identify those elements with excessive warpage and view the saved failed elements.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the modelchk_final.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

Page 173: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials171

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of themodelchk_final.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

To change the performance graphics mode and view the model in hidden line mode:

1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.

2. Select the graphics subpanel.

3. Click the toggle and select performance.

4. Select the vis panel on the permanent menu.

5. Click the Hidden Line with Mesh Lines icon,

6. Click all.

7. Click return twice to access the files panel.

8. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 174: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering172

To test elements for warpage:

1. Select the check elems panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the 3-D subpanel to indicate the type of element you want to check.

3. Click the data entry field after warpage > and enter 5.0 to specify the maximum allowablewarpage.

4. Click warpage.

The elements that have a warpage value higher than the value specified are highlighted. Theseelements are also defined as failed elements.

5. The number of failed elements and the maximum warpage value are displayed in the header bar.

6. Pick any of the highlighted elements from the graphics area to check the warpage of theindividual elements

To save failed elements:

Isolate the failed elements with the save failed option. The save failed option allows you to placeentities that are not written to the deck on the user mark. This situation occurs if there is no definitionfor the entity’s configuration and type in the specified template.

1. Click save failed.

2. Click return.

To view the saved failed elements only:

1. Select the mask panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the mask subpanel.

3. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

4. Click elems and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.

The failed elements are highlighted.

5. Click elems and select reverse from the extended entity selection menu.

6. Click mask .

Only the failed elements are displayed. This function may be necessary when you are workingwith a large number of elements.

7. Click return.

Page 175: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials173

Testing Elements for Aspect RatioIn this tutorial, identify those elements with high aspect ratios and view the saved failed elements.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the modelchk_final.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of themodelchk_final.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

Page 176: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering174

To check elements for aspect ratio:

1. Select the check elems panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the 3-D subpanel to indicate the type of element you want to check.

3. Click the data entry field after aspect > and enter 5.0 to specify the maximum allowable aspectratio.

4. Click aspect.

The elements that have an aspect ratio value higher than the value specified are highlighted.These elements are defined as failed elements.

5. The number of elements failed and the maximum aspect ratio are displayed in the header bar.

6. Pick any of the highlighted elements from the graphics area to check the aspect ratio of theelements individually.

To save failed elements:

Isolate the failed elements with the save failed option. The save failed option allows you to placeentities that are not written to the deck on the user mark. This situation occurs if there is no definitionfor the entity’s configuration and type in the specified template.

1. Click save failed.

2. Click return.

Page 177: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials175

To view the saved failed elements only:

1. Select the mask panel from the Tool page.

2. Select the mask subpanel.

3. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

4. Click elems and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.

The failed elements are highlighted.

5. Click elems and select reverse from the extended entity selection menu.

6. Click mask .

Only the failed elements are displayed. This function may be necessary when you are workingwith a large number of elements.

7. Click return.

Finding Duplicate Nodes and Free Edges in theModelIn this tutorial, find the duplicate nodes and free edges and equivalence these nodes.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the modelchk_final.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of themodelchk_final.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

Page 178: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering176

To find and equivalence the duplicate nodes:

1. Select the faces panel on the Tool page.

2. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

3. Click elems and select displayed on the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click tolerance = and enter 0.01.

5. Select preview equivalence.

Temporary nodes are created on all the duplicate nodes.

6. Select equivalence.

7. All duplicate nodes are equivalenced.

8. Click return.

NOTE Duplicate nodes are within the specified tolerance and have the samelocation as the other nodes; however, they have not been equivalenced.

To find free edges:

1. Select the edges panel on the Tool page.

2. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

3. Click elems and select displayed on the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click find edges.

5. Click return.

Page 179: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials177

To view the edges only:

The edges created are 1-D elements. To view them alone, turn off the display of the other elements.

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the upper input collector switch and select comps.

3. Click the toggle and select elems.

4. Click none.

5. Click ^edges.

6. Click return.

To validate the free edges, analyze them with respect to the geometry of the model. If there areinvalid free edges, it means there are duplicate nodes that need to be equivalenced. The modelin the graphics area contains an invalid free edge:

7. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

8. Click all.

The other elements are displayed.

9. Click return.

To equivalence the remaining duplicate nodes:

1. Select the edges panel on the Tool page.

2. Click delete edges to delete the edge elements.

3. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

Page 180: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering178

4. Click elems and select displayed on the extended entity selection menu.

5. Click tolerance = and enter 0.2.

6. Click preview equivalence.

Four nodes were found that have not been equivalenced.

7. Click equivalence.

8. Click return.

To recheck for free edges:

1. Select the edges panel on the Tool page.

2. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

3. Click elems and select displayed on the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click find edges.

5. Click return.

To review the edges:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click none.

3. Click ^edges.

4. Click return.

There are no free edges other than the valid ones.

Page 181: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials179

Using OptiStruct in HyperMesh - HM-550This tutorial demonstrates how to retrieve a HyperMesh database containing a fully definedOptiStruct/FEA database, export the input deck, and run an OptiStruct/FEA job from the solver panelin HyperMesh.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise andcontinue doing the exercises in the following order:

• Running OptiStruct/FEA

• Running OptiStruct at the Command Prompt

• Analysis of a Plate with a Hole

• Analysis of a Coffee Pot Lid with Thermal Loads

• Normal Modes Analysis of a Splash Shield

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Running OptiStruct/FEA

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2.Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Double-click file =.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directories arefollowed by a slash, /.

4. Select the plate.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 182: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering180

To write the OptiStruct/FEA .fem input deck file:

Write your OptiStruct/FEA input deck (usually specified with the .fem extension) before runningOptiStruct/FEA.

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the export subpanel.

3. Click template = and type in optistruct/optistruct. Or, click template = a second timeand select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory.

4. Click filename = and enter plate.fem.

5. Click write.

This writes your HyperMesh database as an OptiStruct/FEA ASCII input deck.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

To run OptiStruct/FEA:

1. Select the solver panel on the BCs page.

2. Click the upper switch and select OPTISTRUCT/FEA.

HyperMesh loads the path to the OptiStruct executable in the solver = field. You do not need toedit this field.

3. Click input file = and enter plate.fem, the OptiStruct/FEA input deck. Or, click input file =again and browse your directory structure for the file plate.fem.

4. Click memory in Mb = and enter 10 for the RAM required in MB. RAM is directly dependentupon the number of grids in your model. As a starting point, use 8MB/1000/grids/nodes. You canperform a test that allows OptiStruct/FEA to calculate a recommended amount of RAM for yourmodel.

5. Click solve.

This launches the OptiStruct/FEA job. If the job is successful, results files are created andstored in the directory from which HyperMesh is launched. The plate.out file contains errormessages that can help you debug your input deck if necessary.

6. Click return.

The default files written to your directory are:

plate.res The HyperMesh binary results file.

plate.HM.ent.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organizeelements into entity sets based on their densityresult values (only used with OptiStruct topologyoptimization runs).

Page 183: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials181

plate.HM.comp.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organizeelements into components based on their densityresult values (only used with OptiStruct topologyoptimization runs).

plate.out The OptiStruct output file containing specificinformation on the file set-up, the set-up of youroptimization problem, an estimate for the amount ofRAM and disk space required for the run,information for each optimization iteration, andcomputation time information. Review this file forwarnings and errors that are flagged fromprocessing the plate_hole.fem file.

plate.oslog The OptiStruct log file containing compliance andvolume calculations for each optimization iteration.

Running OptiStruct at the Command PromptIn the section Running OptiStruct/FEA, you ran OptiStruct from the solver panel in HyperMesh. Youcan also run OptiStruct from the command prompt (UNIX or MS-DOS). To run OptiStruct from UNIXor MS-DOS, copy the OptiStruct file plate.fem to the HyperWorks installation directory,$ALTAIR_HOME for MS-DOS and $ALTAIR_HOME/scripts for UNIX.

For UNIX:

To run OptiStruct from the UNIX command prompt, type:

• $ALTAIR_HOME/scripts/optistruct plate.fem -len 10

To check the current version of OptiStruct, type:

• $ALTAIR_HOME/scripts/optistruct -version

To perform a test run to validate your input deck and determine how much RAM and diskspace is necessary for the run, type:

• $ALTAIR_HOME/scripts/optistruct plate.fem -len 10 -check

• Memory requirement information is written to the file plate.out

For MS-DOS:

To run OptiStruct from the MS-DOS command prompt, type:

• $ALTAIR_HOME\optistruct\3.4\bin\opti plate.fem 10

Page 184: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering182

To check the current version of OptiStruct, type:

• $ALTAIR_HOME\optistruct\3.4\bin\opti -version

To perform a test run to validate your input deck and to determine how much RAM and diskspace is necessary for the run, add the check parameter to your input deck and run OptiStructfrom the MS-DOS prompt:

• $ALTAIR_HOME\optistruct\3.4\bin\opti plate.fem 10

• Memory requirement information is written to plate.out

Analysis of a Plate with a HoleIn this tutorial, create finite elements on a given geometry of a plate with a hole, apply boundaryconditions, and perform a finite element analysis of the problem. Use the post-processing tools inHyperMesh to determine deformation and stress characteristics of the loaded plate.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Double-click file =.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directories arefollowed by a slash, /.

4. Select the plate_hole.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm.

5. Click retrieve.

To define the OptiStruct template:

1. Select the template subpanel.

2. Double-click template file =.

3. Select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory. Selecting the OptiStructtemplate allows you to define OptiStruct-specific attributes in your HyperMesh session.

4. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 185: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials183

To define material properties and element thickness:

Create the material collectors before creating the component collectors; components must referencea material collector.

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Select the switch after collector type: and select mats.

4. Click name = and enter steel.

5. Click card image = and select MAT1.

6. Click create/edit.

The MAT1 card image is loaded for the material steel.

7. Click E to make the status title active.

NOTE A status title is displayed as yellow (off) or blue (on). The status titletoggles between the two options when you click it. It is not necessary todefine a density value since only a static analysis is required. Densityvalues are required, however, for normal modes analysis.

8. Click the data entry field under E and enter 2E5.

9. Click NU, click the data entry field under NU, and enter 0.3.

10. Click return.

11. Select the switch after collector type: and select comps.

12. Click name = and enter shells.

13. Click card image = and select PSHELL.

14. Click material = and select steel.

15. Click color and select color 8.

16. Click create/edit.

This loads the PSHELL card image for the new component, shells. It also assigns color 8 tothe elements that are organized into this component, and assigns the material steel to thiscomponent.

17. Click T to make the status title active.

18. Click the data entry field under T and enter 10.

OptiStruct stores information regarding shell thickness on the PSHELL card.

19. Click return.

Page 186: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering184

A component is created named shells. Any elements created and organized into the shellscomponent have thickness attributes defined on the PSHELL card for the shells component (T =10.0mm). The elements have material attributes defined on the MAT1 card by the materialcollector steel, since the shells component references this material.

20. Click return again to access the main menu.

Use the card image subpanel to edit the card images for these collectors.

Use the update subpanel to define a different material for the components.

To mesh the geometry:

The automeshing module allows you to mesh interactively on surfaces. It also includes some toolsfor manipulating surface edges and meshing fixed points (locations where the mesher is required toplace a node). The elements generated are organized into the current component, shells.

1. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the surface displayed in the graphics area and click mesh.

3. Click using size = and enter 40.

4. Click recalc all.

5. Click mesh.

The automesher creates about 400 elements on the surface.

Plate mesh using element size of 40mm

6. Click return to save the mesh in the shells component.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 187: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials185

Applying Boundary Conditions to the Model

In this section, the model is constrained such that two of the four edges cannot move. A total lateralload of 1000N is applied at the edge of the hole so that all forces point in the positive z-direction.

To create collectors:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols.

4. Click name = and enter spcs.

5. Click color and select color 10.

6. Click create.

The collector was created.

7. Click name = again and enter forces.

8. Click color and select color 15.

9. Click create.

The collector was created.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

To create constraints:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click loadcol = and select spcs.

3. Click return.

4. Select the constraints panel on the BCs page.

5. Click nodes and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.

HyperMesh goes to the build window panel.

6. Click interior if not already selected.

7. Create a window around the left and right edges of the model. Do this by picking points on thescreen with your mouse.

8. Click select entities.

The nodes along the left and right edges of the model are selected (see the figure below).

Page 188: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering186

HyperMesh returns to the constraints panel.

Select these nodes to apply single point constraints

9. Click dof1 - dof6, if not already selected.

NOTE Dofs that are checked are constrained.

Dofs 1,2, and 3 are x, y, and z translation degrees of freedom

Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom.

10. Click create to apply these constraints to the selected nodes.

To create forces on the nodes around the hole:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click loadcol = and select forces.

3. Click return.

4. Click return again to access the main menu.

5. Select the forces panel on the BCs page.

6. Click nodes and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.

HyperMesh goes to the build window panel.

7. Click interior if not already selected.

8. Create a window around the hole of the model. Do this by picking points on the screen with yourmouse.

9. Click select entities.

Page 189: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials187

The nodes around the hole of the model are selected (see the figure below).

HyperMesh returns to the constraints panel.

Select these nodes to create loading around the hole

10. Click nodes and select save from the extended entity selection menu.

11. Click return.

12. Select the count panel on the Tool page.

The nodes are counted automatically so that a calculation can be made to create a total force of1000N.

13. Click the upper left switch and select nodes.

14. Click nodes and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.

15. The nodes saved in the forces panel are retrieved.

16. Click selected to count the number of nodes around the hole.

17. Click return.

18. Select the forces panel on the BCs page.

19. Click nodes and select retrieve.

20. Click magnitude = and enter 1000.

21. Click the vector definition switch below magnitude = and select z-axis.

22. Click create.

23. Click return.

Page 190: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering188

The last step in setting up the boundary conditions is to create a NASTRAN subcase (a loadstep in HyperMesh).

1. Select the load steps panel on the BCs page.

2. Click name = and enter lateral force.

3. Click loadcols and select spcs and forces.

4. Click select.

5. Click create.

The load step has been created.

6. Click return.

Submitting the job

To write the file:

Write your OptiStruct/FEA input deck (usually specified with the .fem extension) before runningOptiStruct/FEA.

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the export subpanel.

3. Click template = and type in optistruct/optistruct. Or, click template = a second timeand select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory.

4. Click filename = and enter plate_hole.fem.

5. Click write.

This writes your HyperMesh database as an OptiStruct/FEA ASCII input deck.

6. Click return.

To run OptiStruct/FEA:

1. Select the solver panel on the BCs page.

2. Click the upper switch and select OPTISTRUCT/FEA.

HyperMesh loads the direct path to the OptiStruct executable in the solver = field. You do notneed to edit this field.

3. Click input file = and enter plate_hole.fem, the OptiStruct/FEA input deck. Or, click inputfile = again and browse your directory structure for the file plate_hole.fem.

4. Click memory in Mb = and enter 10 for the RAM required in MB. RAM is directly dependentupon the number of grids in your model. As a starting point, use 8MB/1000 grids or nodes. You

Page 191: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials189

can perform a test that allows OptiStruct/FEA to calculate a recommended amount of RAM foryour model.

5. Click solve.

6. This launches the OptiStruct/FEA job. If the job is successful, results files are created in thedirectory from which you select the file plate_hole.fem. The plate_hole.out file containserror messages that can help you debug your input deck if necessary.

The default files written to your directory include:

plate_hole.res The HyperMesh binary results file.

plate_hole.HM.ent.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organizeelements into entity sets based on their densityresult values (only used with OptiStruct topologyoptimization runs).

plate_hole.HM.comp.cmf A HyperMesh command file used to organizeelements into components based on their densityresult values (only used with OptiStruct topologyoptimization runs).

plate_hole.out The OptiStruct output file containing specificinformation on the file set-up, the set-up of youroptimization problem, an estimate for the amountof RAM and disk space required for the run,information for each optimization iteration, andcomputation time information. Review this file forwarnings and errors that are flagged fromprocessing the plate_hole.fem file.

plate_hole.oslog The OptiStruct log file containing compliance andvolume calculations for each optimizationiteration.

Viewing the results

OptiStruct generates displacement and von Mises stress results for your linear static analysis. Thissection describes how to view those results in HyperMesh. You need to load your HyperMesh binaryresults file to view your results.

To load the results file:

1. Select the files panel on any page in HyperMesh.

2. Select the results subpanel.

3. Click results = and enter plate_hole.res. Or, click results = a second time and browse yourdirectory structure for the file.

4. Click return.

Page 192: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering190

To view a deformed shape:

1. Select the deformed panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation =.

There are two simulations: DENSITY - ITER 0 and SUBCASE1 - ITERATION 0. If you arerunning a linear static analysis only, you can ignore the DENSITY simulation. Simulationstagged with SUBCASE contain the results from your analysis.

If you had created two load steps, three simulations would exist: DENSITY - ITER 0,SUBCASE1 - ITERATION 0, and SUBCASE2 - ITERATION 0. The subcase IDs reflect yourHyperMesh load step IDs.

3. Click SUBCASE 1 - ITERATION 0.

4. Click model units = and enter 250.

5. Click deform to view a deformed plot of your model overlaid on the original, undeformed mesh(refer to the figure below).

6. Select the view panel on the permanent menu and select iso 1.

Isometric view of deformed plot overlaid on original, undeformed mesh. Model units are set to 250.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

8. Select the view panel on the permanent menu and select top.

To view a contour plot of stresses and displacements:

1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the toggle after engine: to performance.

3. Click return.

4. Select the contour panel on the Post page.

5. Click simulation = and select SUBCASE 1 -ITERATION 0.

6. Click data type = and select displacements.

There are three data types available: displacements, von Mises stress and density. The

Page 193: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials191

density data type is used only with topology optimization results and is not used in thisprocedure.

7. Click contour.

8. Click data type = and select von Mises stress.

9. Click assign.

10. Click contour and compare your model to the figure below.

11. Click return.

von Mises stress plot using discrete contours (performance graphics selected)

Page 194: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering192

Analysis of Coffee Pot Lid with Thermal LoadsIn this tutorial, apply boundary conditions and perform a finite element analysis of an existing finiteelement model of a plastic coffee pot lid. Use the post-processing tools in HyperMesh to determinedeformation and stress characteristics of the loaded plate.

Before importing the model for this tutorial, delete the current model from HyperMesh.

To delete the current model:

1. Select the delete panel on the Tool page.

2. Click delete model.

3. Click yes to delete the current model.

Deleting the current model clears the current HyperMesh database. Information saved in .hmfiles is not affected.

4. Click return to access the main menu.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the import subpanel.

3. Double-click translator =.

4. Select the optistruct.exe input translator. The OptiStruct input translator allows you to retrievemodel information stored in an OptiStruct ASCII .fem file.

5. Double-click filename = and select the file coffee_lid.fem, located in the HyperWorksinstallation directory under /tutorials/hm/.

6. Click import.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

By default, HyperMesh sizes the icons that represent the temperature loads to 100% of thetemperature magnitude. These icons may be too large with respect to the model size. To change thesize, follow these steps:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the upper switch and select loadcols.

3. Click none to turn off the thermal loading.

4. Click f to maximize the view of the displayed collectors in the graphics area.

5. Click return.

Page 195: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials193

To define your OptiStruct template:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the template subpanel.

3. Double-click template file =.

4. Select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory. Selecting the OptiStructtemplate allows you to define OptiStruct-specific attributes in your HyperMesh session.

5. Click return.

To define the material properties and element thickness:

The model you imported has two component collectors without any materials. In this step, create amaterial collector and assign it to your component collectors.

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select mats.

4. Click name = and enter plastic.

5. Click card image = and select MAT1.

6. Click create/edit.

This loads the MAT1 card image for the material plastic.

7. Click E to make the status title active.

NOTE A status title is displayed as yellow (off) or blue (on). The status titletoggles between the two options when you click it. It is not necessary todefine a density value since only a static analysis is required. Densityvalues are required, however, for normal modes analysis.

8. Click the data entry field under E and enter 1137MPa.

9. Click NU, click the data entry field under NU, and enter 0.26.

10. Click A, click the data entry field under A, and enter 81E-6mm/mm/C.

A is the coefficient of linear thermal expansion.

11. Click return.

12. Select the switch after collector type: and select comps.

13. Select the card image subpanel.

14. Double-click name = and select shells.

Page 196: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering194

15. Click edit.

16. Make sure the value of T is 2.5. If it is not, click T, click the data entry field under T, and enter2.5.

17. Click return.

18. Double-click name = and select shells_nondesign.

19. Click T, click the data entry field under T, and enter 2.5.

20. Click return.

OptiStruct stores information regarding shell thickness on the PSHELL card in the T block.

Notice that both components have MID’s of 0.

21. Click return to access the main menu.

To assign a material collector to each component:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the update subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps.

4. Click comps and select shells and shells_nondesign.

5. Click select.

6. Click material = and select plastic.

7. Click update and select material id.

8. Click update.

At this point, check your component collector PSHELL cards again to ensure that the MIDs are nowset to 1.

1. Select the card image subpanel.

2. Double-click name = and enter shells.

3. Click edit.

Check that the MIDs are set to 1.

4. Click return.

5. Double-click name = and select shells_nondesign.

6. Click edit.

Check that the MIDs are set to 1.

Page 197: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials195

7. Click return.

8. Click return again to access the main menu.

To apply boundary conditions to the model:

In this section, the model is constrained opposite the spout to simulate two hinges. Two constraintsare applied at the corners of the spout so that the nodes do not move vertically.

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols.

4. Click name = and enter constraints.

5. Click color and select color 8.

6. Click create.

To create constraints at the corners of the spout:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click loadcol and select constraints.

3. Click return.

4. Click return again to access the main menu.

5. Select the constraints panel on the BCs page.

6. Select the two nodes at the corners of the spout, as shown in the figure below.

Select these nodes to create constraints at the spout corners

7. Click dof3 to constrain it, if not already selected.

8. Click size = and enter 1 for the constraint size.

Page 198: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering196

NOTE Dofs that are checked are constrained.

Dofs 1, 2, and 3 are x, y, and z translation degrees of freedom

Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom

9. Select create to constrain the selected nodes.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

To create constraints opposite the spout:

1. Select the create nodes panel on the geom page.

2. Select the type in subpanel.

3. Click the data entry field after x = and enter 0.0.

4. Click the data entry field after y = and enter -10.0.

5. Click the data entry field after z = and enter 0.0.

6. Click create node.

The node is created at the centerline of the coffee lid.

7. Click return.

8. Select the constraints panel on the BCs page.

9. Pick the nodes as shown in the figure below.

Create constraints opposite the spout to model hinges

10. Click dof1, dof2, and dof3 if not already selected.

11. Click create.

Four constraints are created.

12. Click return.

Page 199: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials197

13. Select the temp nodes panel on the Tool page.

14. Click clear all to remove the temp node.

15. Click return.

The last step in setting up the boundary conditions is to create an OptiStruct subcase (a loadstep in HyperMesh).

1. Select the load steps panel on the BCs page.

2. Click name = and enter brew cycle.

3. Click loadcols and select constraints and THERMAL_LOADING from the collector list.

4. Click select.

5. Click create.

The load step has been created.

6. Click return.

Submitting the job

To write your file:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the export subpanel.

3. Click template = and enter optistruct/optistruct. Or, click template = again and selectthe optistruct template file in the optistruct directory.

4. Click filename = and enter lid_complete.fem.

5. Click write.

This writes your HyperMesh database as an OptiStruct/FEA ASCII input deck.

6. Click return.

To run OptiStruct:

1. Select the solver panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the switch and select OPTISTRUCT/FEA.

HyperMesh loads the direct path to the OptiStruct executable in the solver = field. You do notneed to edit this field.

3. Click input file = and enter the OptiStruct input deck lid_complete.fem. Or, click input file =

Page 200: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering198

again and browse your directory structure for the file.

4. Click memory in Mb = and enter 50 for the RAM required in MB. RAM is directly dependentupon the number of grids in your model. As a starting point, use 8MB/1000 grids or nodes. Youcan perform a test that allows OptiStruct/FEA to calculate a recommended amount of RAM foryour model.

5. Click solve.

This launches the OptiStruct/FEA job. If the job is successful, new results files are created in thedirectory from which HyperMesh is run. The lid_complete.out file contains error messagesthat can help you debug your input deck if necessary.

6. Click return.

The default files that are written to your directory are:

lid_complete.res The HyperMesh binary results file.

lid_complete.HM.ent.cmf A HyperMesh command file used toorganize elements into entity sets basedon their density result values (only usedwith OptiStruct topology optimizationruns).

lid_complete.HM.comp.cmf A HyperMesh command file used toorganize elements into components basedon their density result values (only usedwith OptiStruct topology optimizationruns).

lid_complete.out The OptiStruct output file containingspecific information on the file set-up, theset-up of the optimization problem, anestimate for the amount of RAM and diskspace required for the run, information foreach optimization iteration, andcomputation time information. Review thisfile for warnings and errors that areflagged from processing thelid_complete.fem file.

lid_complete.oslog The OptiStruct log file containingcompliance and volume calculations foreach optimization iteration.

Page 201: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials199

Viewing the results

OptiStruct generates displacement and von Mises stress results for your linear static analysis. Thissection describes how to view those results in HyperMesh.

To load the HyperMesh binary results file:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page in HyperMesh.

2. Select the results subpanel.

3. Click results = and enter lid_complete.res. Or, click results = a second time and browseyour directory structure for the file.

4. Click return.

To view a deformed shape:

1. Select the deformed panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation =.

There are two simulations: DENSITY - ITER 0 and SUBCASE 1 - ITERATION 0. If you arerunning only a linear static analysis, the DENSITY simulation can be ignored. Simulationstagged with SUBCASE contain the results from your analysis.

If you had created two load steps three simulations would exist: DENSITY - ITER 0, SUBCASE1 - ITERATION 0, and SUBCASE 2 - ITERATION 0. The subcase IDs reflect your HyperMeshload step IDs.

3. Click SUBCASE 1 - ITERATION 0.

4. Click model units = and enter 2.

5. Click deform to view a deformed plot of your model overlaid on the original undeformed mesh(refer to the figure below).

6. Click return.

Deformed shape with overlay of displacement contour

Page 202: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering200

To view a contour plot of stresses and displacements:

1. Select the contour panel on the Post.

2. Click simulation = and select SUBCASE 1 -ITERATION 0.

3. Click data type = and select Displacements.

There are three data types available: displacements, von Mises stress, and density. Thedensity data type is used only with topology optimization results and is not used in thisprocedure.

4. Click contour.

5. Click data type = and select von Mises stress.

6. Click assign.

7. Click return.

Normal Modes Analysis of a Splash ShieldIn this tutorial, apply boundary conditions and perform a normal modes analysis of the problem usingan existing finite element model of an automotive splash shield. Use the post-processing tools inHyperMesh to determine mode shapes of the model.

Before importing the model for this tutorial, you must delete the current model from HyperMesh.

To delete the current model:

1. Select the delete panel on the Tool page.

2. Click delete model.

3. Click yes to delete the current model.

Deleting the current model clears the current HyperMesh database. Information stored in .hmfiles on your disk is not affected.

4. Click return.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the import subpanel.

3. Double-click translator =.

4. Select the optistruct.exe input translator. The OptiStruct input translator allows you to retrievemodel information stored in an OptiStruct ASCII .fem file.

Page 203: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials201

5. Double-click filename = and select the file sshield.fem, located in the HyperWorks installationdirectory under /tutorials/hm/.

6. Click import.

To define your OptiStruct template:

1. Select the template subpanel.

2. Double-click template file =.

3. Select the optistruct template file in the optistruct directory. The OptiStruct templateallows you to define OptiStruct specific attributes in your HyperMesh session.

4. Click return.

The model contains two rigid spiders where the shield is bolted down. This represents the interactionbetween the bolts and the shield. It is assumed that the bolts are significantly more rigid than theshield.

The dependent nodes of the rigid elements have six degrees of freedom constrained. Each spiderconnects the nodes of the shell mesh together so that they do not move with respect to each other.

To review the rigid elements:

1. Select the rigids panel on the 1-D page.

2. Click review.

3. Select a rigid element from the graphics area.

HyperMesh labels the independent node, the dependent node, and the IDs of the two nodesand the rigid element. HyperMesh also shows the constrained degrees of freedom in the rigidspanel for the rigid element you selected. All rigid elements in this model should have dof1 - dof6constrained.

4. Click return.

To define the material properties:

The model has two component collectors without any materials. In this step, create a materialcollector and assign it to your component collectors. The rigid elements do not need to be assignedto a material.

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select mats.

4. Click name = and enter steel.

Page 204: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering202

5. Click card image = and select MAT1.

6. Click create/edit.

This loads the MAT1 card image for the material steel.

7. Click E to make the status title active.

NOTE A status title is displayed as yellow (off) or blue (on). The status titletoggles between the two options when you click it. It is not necessary todefine a density value since only a static analysis is requried. Densityvalues are required, however, for normal modes analysis.

8. Click the data entry field under E and enter 2.0E5MPa.

9. Click NU, click the data entry field under NU, and enter 0.3.

10. Click RHO, click the data entry field under RHO, and enter 7.85E-9Mg/mm^3.

For this tutorial, it is necessary to define a density value since you will be running a normalmodes solution.

11. Click return.

To assign a thickness to your shell elements:

1. Select the card image subpanel.

2. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps.

3. Double-click name = and select shell, the component containing your shell elements.

4. Click edit.

5. Click T, click the data entry field below T, and enter 0.25 as the thickness of your component.

6. Click return.

To assign the steel material collector to a component:

1. Select the update subpanel.

2. Click the switch after the collector type: and select comps.

3. Click comps and select shell.

4. Click select.

5. Click material = and select steel.

6. Click update and select material id.

7. Click update again.

Page 205: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials203

At this point, check your component collector PSHELL cards again to ensure that the MIDs arenow set to 1.

8. Select the card image subpanel.

9. Double-click name = and select shells.

10. Click edit.

Check that the MIDs are set to 1.

11. Click return.

12. Click return again to access the main menu.

To apply boundary conditions to the model:

In this section, the model is constrained at the bolt locations.

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols.

4. Click name = and enter constraints.

5. Click color and select color 8.

6. Click create.

In the previous tutorials, multiple load collectors were created and grouped together in the loadsteps panel to form an OptiStruct subcase. For example, the constraints load collector and aforces load collector. Both of these boundary conditions were used together in one load step.

In this tutorial, constrain the model using SPC’s at the bolt locations. Those constrains areorganized into the load collector constraints. Designate the analysis as normal modes. Todesignate the subcase, put a load collector with the EIGRL card image into the subcase (or loadstep).

7. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols.

8. Click name = and enter frequencies.

9. Click color and select color 15.

10. Click card image = and select EIGRL.

11. Click create/edit.

Page 206: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering204

To set up the EIGRL card:

Extract the first six roots between 0 and 200 Hz.

1. Click V1, click the data entry field under V1, and enter 0 for the lower bound of the frequencyrange.

2. Click V2, click the data entry field under V2, and enter 200.

3. Click ND, click the data entry field under ND, and enter 6 for the number of roots.

4. Click return.

To create constraints at the bolt locations:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click loadcol and select constraints.

3. Click return.

4. Select the constraints panel on the BCs page.

5. Select the two nodes as shown in the figure below.

6. Select the view panel on the permanent menu and click top.

Select these nodes to constrain the bolt locations (top view)

7. Click dof1 - dof6, if not already selected.

NOTE Dofs that are checked are constrained.Dofs 1, 2, and 3 are x, y, and z translation degrees of freedomDofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom

8. Click create to constrain the selected nodes.

9. Click return.

Page 207: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials205

The last step in setting up the boundary conditions is to create an OptiStruct subcase (a loadstep in HyperMesh).

1. Select the load steps panel on the BCs page.

2. Click name = and enter bolted.

3. Click loadcols and select constraints and frequencies.

4. Click select.

5. Click create.

The load step has been created.

6. Click return.

Submitting the job

To write your file:

1. Select the files panel from any main menu page.

2. Select the export subpanel.

3. Click template = and enter optistruct/optistruct. Or, click template = again and selectthe optistruct template file in the optistruct directory.

4. Click filename = and enter sshield_complete.fem.

5. Click write.

This writes your HyperMesh database as an OptiStruct ASCII input deck.

6. Click return.

To run OptiStruct:

1. Select the solver panel on the BCs page in HyperMesh.

2. Click the switch and select OPTISTRUCT/FEA.

HyperMesh loads the direct path to the OptiStruct executable in the solver = field. You do notneed to edit this field at this time.

3. Click input file = and enter the OptiStruct input deck sshield_complete.fem. Or, click inputfile = again and browse your directory structure for the file.

4. Click memory in Mb = and enter 20 for the RAM required in MB. RAM is directly dependentupon the number of grids in your model. As a starting point, use 8MB/1000 grids. You canperform a test that allows OptiStruct/FEA to calculate a recommended amount of RAM for yourmodel.

Page 208: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering206

5. Click solve.

This starts the OptiStruct/FEA job. If the job is successful, new results files are created in thedirectory from which HyperMesh is run. The sshield_complete.out file contains errormessages that can help you debug your input deck if necessary.

6. Click return.

The average time between starting the analysis and completing the job is 30 seconds. Performancedepends upon your processor, available RAM, and the time required for system communications.

The default files that are written to your directory are:

sshield_complete.res The HyperMesh binary results file.

sshield_complete.HM.ent.cmf A HyperMesh command file used toorganize elements into entity sets basedon their density result values (only usedwith OptiStruct topology optimizationruns).

sshield_complete.HM.comp.cmf A HyperMesh command file used toorganize elements into componentsbased on their density result values (onlyused with OptiStruct topologyoptimization runs).

sshield_complete.out The OptiStruct output file containingspecific information on the file set-up, theset-up of your optimization problem, anestimate for the amount of RAM, anddisk space required for the run,information for each optimizationiteration, and computation timeinformation. Review this file for warningsand errors that are flagged fromprocessing thesshield_complete.fem file.

sshield_complete.oslog The OptiStruct log file containingcompliance and volume calculations foreach optimization iteration.

Viewing the results

OptiStruct generates Eigenvector results for your normal modes analysis. This section describeshow to view your results in HyperMesh.

To load the results file:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the results subpanel.

3. Click results file= and enter sshield_complete.res. Or, click results = a second time andbrowse your directory structure for the file.

Page 209: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials207

4. Click return.

To view a deformed shape:

1. Select the deformed panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation =.

There are seven simulations:

DENSITY - ITER 0

MODE 1-F#.##E+##-ITER 0

MODE 2-F#.##E+##-ITER 0

MODE 3-F#.##E+##-ITER 0

MODE 4-F#.##E+##-ITER 0

MODE 5-F#.##E+##-ITER 0

MODE 6-F#.##E+##-ITER 0

If you are running a normal modes analysis only, the DENSITY simulation can be ignored.Simulations containing the word “MODE” and numbers contain the results from your analysis.

The frequency values for the six roots that OptiStruct extracted are:

MODE 1 = Hz.

MODE 2 = Hz.

MODE 3 = Hz.

MODE 4 = Hz.

MODE 5 = Hz.

MODE 6 = Hz.

3. Select the simulation for MODE 1.

4. Click model units = enter 15.

5. Click modal to view an animation of the mode shape at the first frequency.

For modal solutions, make sure that the nodes that are constrained are not moving.

6. View the rest of your mode shapes using the same model units.

When you select MODE 5, how does your model compare with the figure below?

Page 210: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering208

Mode shape of 5th root, 287Hz.

Analysis Review

• In this analysis, it was assumed that the bolts were significantly stiffer than the shield. If thebolts needed to be made of aluminum and the shield was still made of steel, would you need tomodify your model and run the analysis again?

• It is necessary to push the natural frequencies of the splash shield above 50Hz. With thecurrent model, you should have one mode that violates this constraint: MODE 1, 43Hz. Designspecifications allow the inner disjointed circular rib to be modified such that no significant massis added to the part. The available package space for this new rib is shown as the solid regionin the figure below. The thickness of the solid region is equal to the depth of the original rib. Isthere a better configuration for this rib within the above stated constraints that will push the firstmode above 50Hz? (see the OptiStruct tutorial OS-3001 to redesign this part)

Yellow, solid region represents the available package space for redesigning the inner disjointed circular rib

Page 211: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials209

Deformed and Contour Plotting - HM-610This tutorial introduces the deformed and contour panels, which are used for post-processing andviewing finite element analysis (FEA) results files. Additional viewing options are available on thesepanels if you use the performance graphics engine.

contour panel Allows you to create contour and assigned plots of your model. Usethis function to see your results graphically, in either a contour orassigned plot mode.

deformed panel The deformed panel plots displacement analysis results. Use thisfunction to see the motion of your structure after analysis.

The following exercises are included:

• Creating a Contour Plot

• Creating an Assign Plot

• Cutting planes using the contour panel

• Isosurface plotting in performance graphics mode using the contour panel

• Plotting a structure using the deformed panel

• Creating a linear animation sequence

• Creating a modal animation sequence

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Creating a Contour PlotIn the following tutorial, use the contour panel to view results from a structural analysis. The resultsare represented by color-coding the model, such that each color represents the differentengineering values of each section of the structure.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the bumper.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under

Page 212: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering210

/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thebumper.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The bumper.hm file

To retrieve the analysis results file:

1. Select the global panel from the permanent menu.

2. Click results file = twice.

3. Select the bumper.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

4. Click return.

To create and display a contour plot using the analysis results file:

1. Select the contour panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation = and select NEAR CENTER HIT-LINE LOAD.

3. Click data type = and select Displacements.

4. Click title = and enter This is the title for the contour plot.

Page 213: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials211

5. Click contour.

The contoured plot is displayed. The legend, which identifies the values associated with thecolor bars, is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area. The title of the plot is alsodisplayed.

Contour plot of the file bumper.hm

To attach titles to the entities with the least and greatest results values:

1. Click min/max titles.

2. Click contour.

For contour plots, the titles are attached to nodes in the graphics area.

To use the info title function:

1. Click info title.

2. Click contour.

A new title box, displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area, describes features of thedisplayed results.

Page 214: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering212

To display a full size screen plot:

1. Click full size.

2. Click contour.

The main menu is removed and a full size screen plot is displayed.

3. To return to the main menu, click a mouse button.

To change the color of the mesh lines:

1. Click mesh color and select Color 12.

2. Click contour.

The mesh lines are yellow.

To change the displacement component:

1. Click the switch next to total disp and select y comp.

The vector component of displacement is used to calculate contours.

By default, the total displacement (total disp) of the node is used as the value in the contour, ifdisplacements are being used to calculate contours.

2. Click contour.

To select a deformed type for the model:

The default mode of the assigned plot is undeformed. You can deform a model by selecting modelunits or scale factor.

1. Click the lower left switch next to undeformed and select scale factor.

2. Click scale factor = and enter 100.0.

3. Click contour.

The model is deformed.

Page 215: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials213

Contour plot, deformed shape of bumper.hm

To change the scale factor:

1. Click mult = and enter 10.000.

2. Click contour.

The engineering values in the results file are changed to reflect this factor. The shape of themodel changes as well.

To redefine a minimum contour value:

By default, values assigned to the colors in the legend are calculated by taking the maximum analysisvalue found in the results file and the minimum value found in the results file and dividing the range ofthese values by the number of colors used in the plot.

1. Click the lower left toggle next to find minimum and select minimum =.

2. Click minimum = and enter 0.000.

This value is assigned to the lowest color in the plot.

3. Click contour.

Page 216: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering214

To redefine a maximum contour value:

1. Click the upper left toggle next to find maximum and select maximum =.

2. Click maximum = and enter 0.01.

This value is assigned to the highest color in the plot.

3. Click contour.

To change the display mode of the contour plot:

1. Click visual options.

A pop-up menu of the display options is displayed.

2. Click the toggle next to mode and switch between hidden line and wireframe.

The model is displayed in hidden line and wireframe mode.

3. Click the toggle next to color and switch between by element and contour.

The color display of the model changes to reflect your selection.

4. Click the toggle next to lights and switch between smooth, flat, and off.

The lighting of the model changes to reflect your selection.

5. Click the toggle next to mesh and switch between mesh, features, and none.

This changes the plotting of the meshed lines.

To create a cutting plane through the model:

1. Click visual options and select cutting plane.

HyperMesh goes to the cutting planes subpanel.

2. Click distance = and enter 10.000.

3. Pick three nodes on the model.

These nodes define the cutting plane direction.

4. Pick a base node on the model.

The model will be cut at that node.

5. Select cut plane.

The model is cut.

Page 217: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials215

Contour plot of bumper.hm using a cutting plane

6. Click reverse plane.

The reverse of the model is removed from view.

7. Click translate +.

The cutting plane is moved 10.000 positive units forward in the direction normal to the planedefined by the three nodes that you selected.

8. Select translate -.

The cutting plane is moved 10.000 negative units in the direction normal to the plane defined bythe three nodes you selected.

9. Click clear plane to remove the section cut.

You can now define a new plane cut, if necessary.

10. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Creating an Assign PlotIn the following tutorial, use the contour panel along with the assign plot function to view resultsfrom a structural analysis. The results are represented by color coding the model, such that theeach color represents the different engineering values of each section of the structure.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

Page 218: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering216

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the bumper.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thebumper.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The bumper.hm file

To retrieve the analysis results file:

1. Select the global panel from the permanent menu.

2. Click results file = twice.

3. Select the bumper.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

4. Click return.

Page 219: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials217

To create and display an assign plot using the analysis results file:

1. Select the contour panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation = and select NEAR CENTER HIT-LINE LOAD.

3. Click data type = and select Displacements.

4. Click title = and enter This is the title for the assign plot.

5. Click assign.

The assigned plot is displayed. The legend, which identifies the values associated with thecolor bars, is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area. The title of the plot is alsodisplayed.

The assign function assigns a color to each element in the model, based on the values in theresults file. The elements are then displayed in the solid color assigned to them.

Assign plot of the bumper.hm file

To attach titles to the entities with the least and greatest results values:

1. Click min/max titles.

2. Click assign.

For assigned plots, the titles are attached to the elements.

Page 220: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering218

To use the info title function:

1. Click info title.

2. Click assign.

A new title box, displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area, describes some features ofthe displayed results.

To display a full size screen plot:

1. Click full size.

2. Click assign.

The main menu is removed and a full size screen plot is displayed.

3. To return to the main menu, click a mouse button.

To change the color of the mesh lines:

1. Click mesh color and select Color 12.

2. Click assign.

The mesh lines are yellow.

To change the displacement component:

1. Click total disp and select y comp.

The vector component of displacement is used to calculate contours.

By default, the total displacement (total disp) of the node is used as the value in theassignment, if displacements are being used to calculate assignments.

2. Click assign.

To select a deformed type for the model:

The default mode of the assigned plot is undeformed. You can deform a model by selecting modelunits or scale factor.

1. Click the lower left switch next to undeformed and select scale factor.

2. Click scale factor = and enter 100.0.

3. Click assign.

The model is deformed.

Page 221: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials219

To change the scale factor:

1. Click mult = and enter 10.000.

2. Click assign.

The engineering values in the results file are changed to reflect this factor. The shape of themodel changes as well.

To redefine a minimum contour value:

By default, values assigned to the colors in the legend are calculated by taking the maximum analysisvalue found in the results file and the minimum value found in the results file and dividing the range ofthese values by the number of colors used in the plot.

1. Click the lower left toggle next to find minimum and select minimum =.

2. Click minimum = and enter 0.000.

3. Click assign.

To redefine a maximum contour value:

1. Click the upper left toggle next to find maximum and select maximum =.

2. Click maximum = and enter 0.01.

3. Click assign.

To change the display mode of the contour plot:

1. Click visual options.

A pop-up menu is displayed.

2. Click the toggle next to mode and switch between hidden line and wireframe.

The model is displayed in hidden line and wireframe mode.

3. Click the toggle next to color and switch between by element and contour.

The color display of the model changes to reflect your selection.

4. Click the toggle next to lights and switch between smooth, flat, and off.

The lighting of the model changes to reflect your selection.

5. Click the toggle next to mesh and switch between mesh, features, and none.

This changes the plotting of the meshed lines.

Page 222: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering220

To create a cutting plane through the model:

1. Click visual options and select cutting plane.

2. Click distance = and enter 10.000.

3. Pick three nodes on the model.

These nodes define the cutting plane direction.

4. Pick a base node on the model.

The section cut will be made here.

5. Select cut plane.

The model is cut.

6. Click reverse plane.

The reverse of the model is removed from view.

7. Click translate +.

The cutting plane is moved 10.000 positive units forward in the direction normal to the planedefined by the three nodes that you selected.

8. Click translate -.

The cutting plane is moved 10.000 negative units in the direction normal to the plane defined bythe three nodes that you selected.

9. Click clear plane to remove the section cut.

You can now define a new plane cut, if necessary.

10. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Cutting Planes using the Contour PanelIn the following tutorial, use the performance graphics engine, the contour panel, and the cuttingplane function to create a sectioned result plot of the structural analysis results.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

Page 223: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials221

4. Select the bumper.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thebumper.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The bumper.hm file.

To retrieve the analysis results file:

1. Select the global panel from the permanent menu.

2. Click results file = twice.

3. Select the bumper.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

4. Click return.

Page 224: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering222

To switch to the performance graphics mode:

1. Select the options panel on the permanent menu.

2. Select the graphics subpanel.

3. Click the toggle after engine: to performance.

4. Click return.

To change the display in the graphics area:

1. Select the vis panel on the permanent menu.

2. Select the following icons: and .

3. Click all.

4. Click return.

The performance graphics engine treats each HyperMesh component as an independent unit. Thisfeature allows you to assign a set of display attributes to each component of your model thatdetermine how each component is displayed. For more information on the display attributes that youcan assign to each component, see the topic Component Display in Performance Graphics in theHyperMesh User’s Guide.

To create and display a contour plot:

1. Select the contour panel on the Post page.

2. Select the params subpanel.

3. Click simulation = and select NEAR CENTER HIT-DISTR LOAD.

4. Click data type = and select Displacements.

5. Click title = and enter This is the performance graphics contour plot.

6. Click the toggle and select visual panel.

7. Click contour.

To attach titles to the entities with the least and greatest results values:

1. Click min/max titles.

2. Click contour.

For contour plots, the titles are attached to nodes in the graphics area.

Page 225: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials223

To use the info title function:

1. Click info title.

2. Click contour.

A new title box, displayed in the top left corner of the graphics area, describes some features ofthe displayed results.

To display a full size screen plot:

1. Click full size.

2. Click contour.

The main menu is removed and a full size screen plot is displayed.

3. To return to the main menu, click a mouse button.

To change the color of the mesh:

1. Click the toggle and select visual options.

2. Click mesh color and select Color 12.

3. Click contour.

The mesh lines are yellow.

To change the displacement component:

1. Click the switch next to magnitude and select y comp.

The vector component of displacement is used to calculate contours.

By default, the total displacement (magnitude) of the node is used as the value in the contour ifdisplacements are being used to calculate contours.

2. Click contour.

To select a deformed type for the model:

The default mode of the assigned plot is undeformed. You can deform a model by selecting modelunits or scale factor.

1. Click the lower center switch next to undeformed and select scale factor.

2. Click scale factor = and enter 100.0.

3. Click contour.

The model is deformed.

Page 226: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering224

To change the scale factor:

1. Click mult = and enter 10.000.

2. Click contour.

The engineering values in the results file are changed to reflect this factor. The shape of themodel changes as well.

To redefine a minimum contour value:

By default, values assigned to the colors in the legend are calculated by taking the maximum analysisvalue found in the results file and the minimum value found in the results file and dividing the range ofthese values by the number of colors used in the plot.

1. Select the legend subpanel.

2. Click the lower center toggle and select minimum =.

3. Click minimum = and enter 0.000.

4. Click contour.

To redefine a maximum contour value:

1. Select the legend subpanel.

2. Click the upper left toggle next to find maximum and select maximum =.

3. Click maximum = and enter 0.01.

4. Click contour.

To create a cutting plane on the model:

1. Select the cutting subpanel.

2. Click xy plane and trim planes.

3. Click the upper right toggle next to single and select double.

4. Click t = and enter 25.000.

In the performance graphics engine, the cutting plane function allows three planes to be activesimultaneously. A cutting plane can be moved through the model by selecting the active plane withthe mouse and then dragging it across the model.

Page 227: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials225

xy cutting plane contour plot of bumper.hm

Using the Deformed Panel to Plot a StructureIn the following tutorial, use the deformed panel to view structural analysis results. The results arerepresented as static deformed plots, linear animation, or modal animation. You have the option tocolor code the model, so that different colors represent different engineering values relating to eachsection of the structure.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the bumper.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thebumper.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 228: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering226

The bumper.hm file.

To retrieve the analysis results file:

1. Select the global panel from the permanent menu.

2. Click results file = twice.

3. Select the bumper.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

4. Click return.

To switch from performance graphics mode to standard mode:

1. Select the options panel from the permanent menu.

2. Select the graphics subpanel.

3. Click the toggle next to engine: and select standard, if not already displayed.

To create and display a deformed plot using the analysis results file:

1. Select the deformed panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation = and select NEAR CENTER HIT-LINE LOAD.

3. Click data type = and select Displacements.

4. Click title = and enter This is the title for the deformed plot.

Page 229: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials227

5. Click the leftmost toggle and select model units.

6. Click model units = and enter 45.0.

The node(s) with the maximum displacement in the model is displayed as if it had the valueentered in the model units = field. For example, if the maximum displacement was .001 units,the node would be displaced as if its displacement were 45.0 units. All other displacementswould be interpolated from that point.

7. Click the switch next to undef color and select as selected.

8. Click undef color and select a color from the pop-up window.

The as selected option allows you to select a constant color for all the elements in thestructure.

The use elem color option colors the elements in the structure the same color as the element.

The use background option colors the structure the same color as your background..

9. Click the switch next to deform color and select use elem color.

10. Click deform.

The deformed and undeformed shapes are displayed in the wireframe mode.

11. Click visual options to change the display mode of the model.

NOTE Any change made to the visual options causes the undeformed shape to beremoved from the display.

Deformed and undeformed wireframe plot of bumper.hm

Page 230: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering228

To view the deformed shape in hidden line mode:

1. Click hidden line.

2. Click deform.

To display a full size screen plot:

1. Click full size.

2. Click deform.

The main menu is removed and a full size screen plot is displayed.

3. To return to the main menu, click a mouse button.

To create a linear animation using the analysis results file:

1. Retain the settings from the procedures above.

2. Click frames = and enter 6.

This sets the number of frames of animation to be displayed.

3. Click linear.

HyperMesh calculates the animation frames and displays them. Each frame is a linearinterpolation of the maximum displacement for each node.

During animation, the visual controls in the permanent menu can be used to manipulate theview. The visual options can be used to manipulate the display.

4. Click exit to stop the animation.

5. Click return to access the main menu.

Creating a Modal Animation Sequence

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the rotor.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under

Page 231: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials229

/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the rotor.hmfile.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The rotor.hm model

To retrieve the analysis results file:

1. Select the global panel from the permanent menu.

2. Click results file = twice.

3. Select the rotor.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

4. Click return.

To create a modal animation using the analysis results file:

1. Select the deformed panel on the Post page.

2. Click model units = and enter 30.00.

3. Click frames = and enter 6.

4. Click modal.

Page 232: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering230

HyperMesh calculates the animation frames and displays them. Each frame is a linearinterpolation of the maximum displacement for each node.

Modal animations are calculated and displayed in HyperMesh such that the shape is shown inits positive and negative form. All the visual options, as well as view manipulation, can be usedduring animation.

5. Click exit to stop the animation

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 233: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials231

HyperMesh 3.0 Post-Processing Features - HM-620In this tutorial, use the transient panel and the performance graphics mode to learn about theHyperMesh 3.0 post processing features. These features allow you to create bitmap animations andAVI animation files, display discrete contours in the performance graphics mode, replay previouslysaved files, edit legends, and create EPS files.

The following exercise is included:

• Using the Post-Processing Features on the options and transient panels

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Using the Post-Processing Features on the options andtransient panels

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1.Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the treb.hm30 file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thetreb.hm30 file.

6. Click retrieve.

To retrieve the analysis results file:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the results subpanel.

3. Click results file = twice.

4. Select the treb.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

Page 234: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering232

5. Click return to exit the files panel.

To change from the standard to performance graphics mode:

1. Select the options panel on permanent menu.

2. Select the graphics subpanel.

3. Click the toggle after engine: and select performance.

4. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Perform the following procedures in performance graphics mode:

To specify a bitmap animation preference:

• Click the switch after bitmap animation: and select simple.

To change the AVI window size:

• Click the switch after AVI Options and select ¼ screen.

To change the result color type - performance graphics mode:

1. Click the toggle after result color type: and select discrete contours.

Discrete contours produces discrete color bands on contour plots with distinct boundariesbetween contour levels.

2. Click return to exit the options panel.

Use the transient panel to perform the following procedures:

To create an animation sequence from transient results:

1. Select the transient panel on the Post page.

2. Click start with =.

HyperMesh displays a list of the available simulations.

3. Select Time step 0, t = 0.000e+00 to be used as the starting point for calculating the deformedshape of the structure.

4. Click end with =.

5. Select Time step 26, t = 2.500e+00 as the last simulation to be used.

6. Click data type =.

Page 235: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials233

7. Select Vonmises (mid) as the data type used to calculate the deformed shape of the structure.

8. Click the toggle before find maximum and select maximum =.

9. Click maximum = and enter 2000 as the maximum data type value on the contour plot.

10. Click transient.

In the header bar, the message “Some element results not found (ignored)” is displayed. Thismessage occurs because rigid links and joints are displayed in the graphics area. HyperMeshdoes not support results for these entities.

HyperMesh goes to the animation panel.

11. Click the leftmost toggle and select visual options.

12. Click the toggle after mode and select hidden line.

13. Click the toggle after color and select contour.

To create a replay file:

1. Click create replay.

2. Click return to exit the animation panel and return to the transient panel.

To reverse the legend data type values:

1. Click the legend in graphics area to activate the legend edit panel.

2. Click reverse legend.

3. Click return to exit the legend edit panel.

HyperMesh returns to the transient panel.

4. Click transient.

In the header bar, the message “Some element results not found (ignored)” is displayed. Thismessage occurs because rigid links and joints are displayed in the graphics area. HyperMeshdoesn’t support results for these entities.

HyperMesh returns to the animation panel, the bitmap frames are built, and the animationbegins.

5. Click return to exit animation panel.

HyperMesh returns to the transient panel.

To turn off the legend and simulation titles:

1. Click w on the permanent menu.

Page 236: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering234

2. Click display legend to make this option inactive.

3. Click display simulation title to make this option inactive.

4. Click return to exit the w panel.

5. Click transient.

In the header bar, the message “Some element results not found (ignored)” is displayed. Thismessage occurs because rigid links and joints are displayed in the graphics area. HyperMeshdoesn’t support results for these entities.

To create an AVI file:

1. Click make AVI.

The file is generated and saved in your specified user directory with a file extension of .AVI.The file is the size specified under AVI Options in the options panel. File names areautomatically incremented when you create multiple AVI files. You can insert AVI files intoMicrosoft Word or PowerPoint files.

2. Click return to exit the animation panel.

3. Click return to exit the transient panel.

Page 237: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials235

Building and Annotating Plots - HM-700This tutorial introduces the panels used to build and annotate plots and curves.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise andcontinue doing the exercises in the following order:

The following exercises are included:

• Using the results curves panel

• Using the plots panel

• Using the query curves panel

• Using the curve attribs panel

• Using the axis scaling panel

• Using the axis labels panel

• Using the grid attribs panel

• Using the grid labels panel

• Using the legend panel

• Using the border panel

• Using the plot titles panel

• Exporting curve data with the simple math panel

• Using the read curves panel

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Using the results curves panelThe results curves panel allows you to create curves by extracting data from a HyperMesh resultsfile.

The along nodes and position subpanels allow you to create a contour plot of the model. Then, thepanels allow you to select nodes along a path or select nodes that are then used in the order in whichthey occur along a specified axis.

In this tutorial, create plots with curves using the data from a HyperMesh binary results file and theresults, along nodes, position, and along cut subpanels.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

Page 238: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering236

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the raildemo.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theraildemo.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

To specify a HyperMesh binary results file:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the results subpanel.

3. Click results file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the raildemo.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that results = now displays the location of theraildemo.res file.

6. Click return.

To create a plot and curves using the results subpanel:

1. Select the xy plots module on the Post page.

2. Select the results curves panel.

3. Select the results subpanel.

4. Click the upper switch and select create new plot.

5. Click x data type = and select time.

6. Click y data type = and select Displacements.

7. Click start with = and select Rail Crash, t = 0.29959E-03.

8. Click end with = and select Rail Crash, t = 0.12000E-01.

Page 239: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials237

9. Click the lower input collector switch and select nodes.

10. Pick three nodes on the model in the graphics area. Pick a node near each end and one node inthe center of the model.

11. Click create.

Three displacements vs. time curves are created on a standard plot. The plot is located in theupper left corner of the graphics area. The name of the plot, untitled1, is displayed in thecreate new plot data entry field.

To create a plot and a curve using the along nodes subpanel:

1. Select the xy plots module on the Post page.

2. Select the results curves panel.

3. Select the along nodes subpanel.

4. Click simulation = and select Rail Crash, t = 0.12000E-01.

5. Click contour.

A contour plot of total displacements is created.

6. Pick 14 nodes on the model so that the nodes define a path. Pick the nodes across the differentcontour colors where the model curves.

NOTE The order in which the nodes are picked determines the connectivity ofthe data points on the curve being created.

7. Click plot list.

A Displacements vs. Distance Along Node Path curve is created on a standard plot nameduntitled2. HyperMesh names the curve curve8. The plot is located in the lower rightcorner of the graphics area. The name of the plot is displayed in the create new plot data entryfield.

To create a plot and a curve using the position subpanel:

1. Select the xy plots module on the Post page.

2. Select the results curves panel.

3. Select the position subpanel.

4. Click the switch after axis: and select x axis.

5. Click contour.

A contour plot of total displacements along the x-axis is created.

6. Pick 14 nodes on the model so that the nodes define a path. Pick the nodes across the differentcontour colors where the model curves.

Page 240: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering238

7. Click plot axis.

A Displacements vs. Distance Along X Axis curve is created on a standard plot nameduntitled3. HyperMesh names the curve curve9. The plot is located in the lower rightcorner of the graphics area. The name of the plot is displayed in the create new plot data entryfield.

NOTE Complex data can also be plotted for shell elements using the results,along nodes, and position subpanels on the results curve panel. Formore information, see the HyperMesh 3.0 Update Training document.

To reposition a plot on the screen:

1. Click w on the permanent menu.

2. Click move.

3. Hold down the mouse button and drag the plot containing curve 9 to the upper right corner of thegraphics area.

4. Click p on the permanent menu to refresh the screen.

5. Click move.

6. Hold down the mouse button and drag the plot containing curve 8 to the upper middle section ofthe graphics area.

7. Click p.

8. Click return.

To create a plot and a curve using the along cut subpanel:

1. Select the xy plots module on the Post page.

2. Select the results curves panel.

3. Select the along cut subpanel.

NOTE If the along cut subpanel is not visible, switch from the performance tostandard graphics mode. If it is visible, go to step 4.

To switch from performance to standard graphics mode:

- Click return.

- Select the options panel on the permanent menu.

- Select the graphics subpanel.

- Click the toggle and select standard.

- Click return.

- Select the results curves panel on the xy plots module.

Page 241: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials239

- Select the along cut subpanel.

4. Click simulation = and select Rail Crash, t = 0.12000E-01.

5. Click contour.

A contour plot of total displacements is created.

6. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select N1 N2 N3.

7. Click edit.

8. Click x = under N1 and enter 539.054.

In the Node Vector Edit panel, x =, y =, z = data entry fields are displayed under N1, N2, N3,and base.

9. Click y = under N1 and enter 15.000.

10. Click z = under N1 and enter 53.749.

11. Click x = under N2 and enter 525.688.

12. Click y = under N2 and enter 15.000.

13. Click z = under N2 and enter 40.833.

14. Click return.

A purple circle in the graphics area indicates the base node location.

15. Click cut plane.

16. Click plot cut.

A Displacements vs. Distance Along Cut curve is created for the nodes that are on the cutplane. HyperMesh names the curve curve10. curve10 is located on the standard plot in thelower right corner of the graphics area. The name of the standard plot, untitled4, isdisplayed in the create new plot data entry field.

17. Click return.

18. Click exit.

To rename a plot:

1. Select the rename panel on the Tool page.

2. Click the switch and select plots.

3. Click collector = and select untitled1.

4. Click new name = and enter myplot1.

5. Click rename.

Page 242: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering240

In the header bar, the message “The collector was renamed” is displayed.

6. Click return.

7. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

8. Click the upper switch and select plots.

9. Notice that the plot collector untitled1 is now named myplot1

10. Click return to access the main menu

Using the plots panelThe plots panel is used to create new plots and allows you to select curves to include on the plot.You can create plots with default attributes or with attributes of an existing plot. In this tutorial, add anexisting curve to a plot, create an entirely new plot, and create a plot with the attributes of an existingplot.

To display a plot:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the upper switch and select plots.

3. Click none.

No plots are displayed in the graphics area.

4. Select raildisp and railstrs.

Two plots are displayed in the graphics area.

5. Right-click railstrs.

The railstrs plot is no longer displayed in the graphics area.

6. Click p on the permanent menu.

7. Click return.

To create an entirely new plot collector:

1. Select the xy plots module on the Post page.

2. Select the plots panel.

3. Click plot = and enter myplot2.

Click the switch and select standard.

Page 243: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials241

4. Click create plot.

A standard plot is created and is located in the upper left corner of the graphics area on top ofthe plot raildisp.

To create an new plot based on default values from an existing plot:

1. Click plot = and enter myplot3.

2. Click like = and select raildisp.

3. Click create plot.

A plot is created with the same attributes as the plot raildisp. The new plot is displayed in theupper left corner of the graphics area on top of the plots myplot2 and raildisp.

To add a curve to a plot:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click none.

3. Select myplot1 and raildisp.

4. Click return.

5. Reposition the displayed plots:

- Click w on the permanent menu.

- Click push.

- In the header bar, the message “Select a window to push to the background” is displayed.

- Select the plot raildisp in the graphics area.

- The plot myplot1 is now on top of the plot raildisp.

- Click return.

6. Double-click plot =.

7. Select myplot1.

8. Click select curves.

9. Select curve 3.

Curves 2, 3, 6, and 7 are selected. Curves, 2, 6, and 7 are displayed on the plot myplot1.

10. Click return.

curve3 is added to the plot myplot1. There are now four curves on the plot myplot1.

11. Click return.

Page 244: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering242

To expand a plot to fill the screen:

1. Click w on the permanent menu.

2. Click expand.

3. Select the plot myplot1 from the graphics area.

The plot expands to fill the screen.

4. Click return.

Using the query curves panelThe query curves panel allows you to find the x and y values of a point in a curve. You can editcurve titles displayed in the plot legends as well. In this tutorial, view curve data points.

To view a curve’s data points:

1. Select the query curves panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select myplot1.

3. Click curve =.

4. Pick curve3 (the green curve) in the graphics area.

curve = displays curve3. The data entry field following points = displays 40, indicating thatthere are 40 XY data points on curve3. The data entry field following title = displays node705. Curve3 plots the time step results data for node 705 in the model.

5. Pick curve3 in the graphics area.

A white circle is displayed on the curve. The x-axis and y-axis coordinates for this point aredisplayed in their respective data entry fields.

6. Pick other points on curve3.

The coordinates listed in the data entry fields for x = and y = change as you select a new point.

7. Click return.

Using the curve attribs panelThe curve attribs panel allows you to create and edit curves displayed on an xy plot. In this tutorial,change the curve attributes and add a marker to a curve.

To change curve attributes:

Page 245: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials243

1. Select the curve attribs panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot =.

3. Select the plot in the graphics area.

The data entry field following plot = displays myplot1.

4. Click auto color.

A new color is assigned to the curves, which were previously gray.

5. Click curve = and select curve 6.

6. Click the toggle and select thick lines.

The line thickness for curve 6 reflects this change.

7. Click color and select color 6 from the pop-up menu.

The color of curve 6 changes. The legend on myplot1 reflects the change as well.

8. Click the lower switch and select tria marker.

A triangle is displayed at every XY data point on curve6. The legend on myplot1 also displaysthis triangle.

9. Click title =.

10. Enter node 625 Disp (total disp) VS time in the data entry field after title =.

11. Press the ENTER key.

In the plot legend, the title description for curve6 reflects this change.

12. Click return.

Page 246: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering244

Using the axis scaling panelThe axis scaling panel allows you to modify plot axes. In this tutorial, increase the number of x-axisgrid lines.

To increase the number of x-axis grid lines:

1. Select the axis scaling panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select myplot1.

3. Click x increment = and enter .0005.

On the plot myplot1, grid lines are placed at every increment of .0005 along the x-axis.

4. Click return.

Using the axis labels panelThe axis labels panel allows you to edit the axis label information of the current plot or selectedattributes in a group of plots. In this tutorial, add x and y-axis titles and change their color and fontsize.

To add x and y-axis titles:

1. Select the axis labels panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select myplot1.

3. Click xaxis title = and enter time.

4. Click yaxis title = and enter Displacements.

NOTE When yaxis title = is selected, the x-axis title Time is displayed in the graphics area.

5. Click color and select color 13.

NOTE When color is selected, the axis title Displacements is displayed in the graphicsarea.

6. Click the switch and select font 3.

The font size for the x and y-axis titles change.

7. Click return.

Page 247: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials245

Using the grid attribs panelThe grid attribs panel allows you to edit the grid line information contained in a plot. In this tutorial,change plot grid lines so that they have the grid attributes of an existing plot.

To change the grid lines of a plot to have the grid attributes of an existing plot:

1. Select the grid attribs panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select raildisp.

3. The plot raildisp is on top of the plot myplot1.

4. Click plots and select myplot1.

5. Click select.

6. Click update.

7. Select gridcolor, width, line style, and margin.

8. Click update.

The plot myplot1 is updated to have the same grid attributes as the plot raildisp. The plotraildisp is moved to the background; and only the plot myplot1 is visible in the graphics area.

9. Click return.

Using the grid labels panelThe grid labels panel allows you to edit the grid labels on the x and y axes of a plot. In this tutorial,edit the grid label format of the plot and specify the level of precision.

To change the grid label format and precision of a plot:

1. Select the grid labels panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select myplot1.

3. Click the switch after x: and select exponential.

The x-axis grid label format reflects this change.

4. Click the switch after y: and select exponential.

The y-axis grid label format reflects this change.

5. Click the upper precision = and enter 1.The x-axis grid label precision reflects this change.

6. Click the lower precision = and enter 1.

The y-axis grid label precision reflects this change.

Page 248: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering246

7. Click return.

Using the legend panelThe legend panel allows you to edit the legend associated with a xy plot.

To move a plot legend:

1. Select the legend panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select myplot1.

3. Click move legend.

4. Click the upper left corner of the plot.

The legend of the plot moves to that location.

5. Click return.

Using the border panelThe border panel allows you to edit the border of an xy plot. In this tutorial, change a plot border’scolor and margin.

NOTE Changes made to the border of the plot, such as editing the color and line thickness,are also reflected in the border of the plot legend. Turning off the border of the plotalso turns off the plot legend’s border.

To change the border color and margin of the plot:

1. Select the border panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select myplot1.

3. Click border color and select color 13.

The borders of the plot and the legend are outlined with color 13.

4. Click border margin = and enter 0.

The margin between the border of the plot and the plot reflects this change.

5. Click return.

Page 249: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials247

Using the plot titles panelThe plot titles panel allows you to edit plot titles. In this tutorial, add a title to a plot and change thetitle’s color and font size.

To add a title to the plot:

1. Select the plot titles panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and select myplot1.

3. Click title = and enter Displacements vs Time.

The title on the plot myplot1 changes.

4. Click title and select color 6.

The title of the plot changes color.

5. Click the switch under title and select font 4.

The plot title’s font size changes.

6. Try changing the subtitle and label of the plot, and their color and font size.

7. Click return.

Exporting Curve Data with the simple math panelThe simple math panel allows you to perform simple math functions on a curve. In this tutorial,export curve data.

To export curve data:

1. Select the simple math panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click the switch and select external.

3. Click plot = and select the plot myplot1.

4. Click 1st curve = and select curve3.

5. Click filter = and enter the path name of the copy command for your operating system.

6. If you are using the UNIX version of HyperMesh, enter /bin/cp in the filter = data entry field.

7. If you are using the WindowsNT version of HyperMesh, enter \winnt\systems32\xcopy inthe filter = data entry field.

8. Click params = and enter curve3_data.ascii.

9. Click execute.

Page 250: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering248

A file named curve3_data.ascii is created and saved to the directory from which HyperMesh isrun. This file contains the xy data for curve3. A copy of curve3 is also created in HyperMesh and isnamed curve11. curve11 is on the plot myplot1. In the data entry field following target = iscurve11.

NOTE If you are using HyperMesh for the PC, a DOS window may appear withthe following message: “Does curve3_data.ascii specify a file nameor directory name on the target <F = file, D = directory)?”

Type F for file.

10. Click return.

11. Review the curve3_data.ascii file.

- For the UNIX version of HyperMesh, go to the directory from which HyperMesh is run.

- For the PC version of HyperMesh, open the file with a text editor.

- The curve3_data.ascii file contains the xy data for curve3.

12. Return to the current HyperMesh session.

To delete curves and plots:

1. Select the delete panel on the Tool page.

2. Click delete.

3. Click the switch and select curves.

4. Click curves and select curve8, curve9, curve10, and curve11.

5. Click select.

6. Click delete.

7. In the header bar, the message “4 entities were deleted” is displayed.

8. Click the switch and select plots.

9. Click plots and select untitled2, untitled3, untitled4, and m2.

10. Click select. yplot

11. Click delete.

12. In the header bar, the message “4 entities were deleted” is displayed.

13. Click return.

Using the read curves panelThe read curves panel allows you to input an xy data set from an ASCII file. In this tutorial, import

Page 251: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials249

the curve data that was exported in the last tutorial.

To input an xy data set:

1. Select the xy plots module on the Post page.

2. Select the read curves panel.

3. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

4. Right-click myplot1 and raildisp.

5. There are no plots displayed in the graphics area.

6. Click myplot3.

7. The plot myplot3 is displayed in the graphics area.

8. Click p on the permanent menu.

9. Click return.

10. Click plot =.

11. Select the plot in the graphics area.

12. The data entry field after plot = displays myplot3.

13. Click file = twice.

14. Select curve3_data.ascii.

15. Click input.

16. The xy data in the curve3_data.ascii file is plotted on the plot myplot3. In the header bar,the message “Finished reading in curve data” is displayed.

17. Click return.

Page 252: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering250

Performing Curve Math - HM-710This tutorial introduces mathematical functions and operators.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, start with the first exercise and continue theexercises in the following order:

• Using the integral math function

• Using the freq math function

• Using the polyfit math function

• Using the vector subrange extractor

• Using the integrate panel

• Using the simple math panel

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Using the Integral Math FunctionThe edit curves panel creates or edits new or existing curves from files or math expressions. Themath expressions can contain functions or operators and curve references. Curve numbers definethe curve references. An example of a curve reference is c4.x, where c is curve, 4 is the curve id,and x is the vector. In this tutorial, create a curve from a data file, modify the curve, and use theintegral math function to return the indefinite integral of a curve.

To create a curve from a data file:

1. Select the xy plots module on the Post page.

2. Select the edit curves panel on the xy plots module.

3. Select the create subpanel.

4. Click x =.

5. Select file as the data source.

6. Click file = twice to access the file directories.

7. Select the rcforc.ascii file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

Note that x = displays the location of the rcforc.ascii file as well as Time. type = displaysTime.

Page 253: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials251

8. Click y =.

9. Select file as the data source.

10. Click file = twice to access the file directories.

11. Select the rcforc.ascii file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

12. Click type =.

13. Select Interface Forces.

14. Click req =.

15. Select Master 1.

16. Click comp =.

17. Select Z.

y = displays the location of the rcforc.ascii file as well as Master 1/Z.

18. Click create.

The plot and curve are created. The plot is named untitled, and the curve is named curve1, bydefault. plot = displays untitled.

To expand the plot to fill the screen:

1. Click w on the permanent menu.

2. Click expand.

3. Pick the plot in the graphics area.

The plot fills the screen.

4. Click return.

To edit a curve:

1. Select the modify subpanel on the edit curves panel.

2. Click curve =.

3. Select curve1.

4. Click comp =.

5. Select Y.

6. Click modify.

Page 254: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering252

curve1 reflects the component Y.

7. Click comp =.

8. Select Z.

9. Click modify.

curve1 reflects the component Z.

10. Click return.

11. Click exit.

Use the following procedures to perform integration curve math:

To display curve IDs:

1. Select the xy plots module on the Post page.

2. Select the legend panel on the xy plots module.

3. Click show ids.

The curve’s ID, 1, is displayed in the plot’s legend.

4. Click return.

To create plots:

1. Select the plots panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot = and enter test2.

3. Click the switch and select standard.

4. Click create plot.

A standard plot is created, located in the upper left corner of the screen. This plot is on top ofthe plot untitled.

5. Repeat steps 2 - 4 to create four standard plots named test3, test4, test5, and test6.

6. In the graphics area, the four plots are stacked on top of the plot test2. It appears that there areonly two plots displayed in the graphics area (untitled and test2).

7. Click return.

Page 255: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials253

To unstack the plots:

1. Click w on the permanent menu.

2. Click unstack.

Six plots are displayed in the graphics area.

3. Click return.

To edit curves:

1. Select the edit curves panel on the xy plots module.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Select math as the data source.

4. Click plot = and select test2.

5. Click the data entry field after x = and enter cl.x.

6. Click the data entry field after y = and enter integral(c1.x,c1.y).

7. Click create.

Given c1, a curve is created which is the indefinite integral of c1. The curve is named curve2and is located on the plot test2.

Using FiltersCurves can be passed through an SAE filter. In this tutorial, filter a curve using the edit curvespanel.

To filter a curve:

1. Click plot = on the edit curves panel.

2. Select untitled.

x = displays c1.x.

3. Click the data entry field after y = and enter saefilter(c1.x,c1.y,180).

4. Click create.

A third curve, curve3, is created on the same plot as curve1.

NOTE For a description of the SAE class filter saefilter and other math functions andoperators, see the topic List of Functions and Operators in the Math Reference chapter.

Page 256: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering254

Using the Freq Math FunctionThe freq function builds a frequency vector from time-domain data.

To build a frequency domain curve:

1. Click plot = on the edit curves panel.

2. Select test3.

3. Click the data entry field after x = and enter freq(c1.x).

4. Click the data entry field after y = and enter fftmag(c1.y).

5. Click create.

Given c1, a curve is created which is the amplitude spectrum of the FFT of c1. The curve isnamed curve4 and is located on the plot test3.

6. Click return.

7. Click axis scaling on the xy plots module.

plot = displays test3.

8. Click the rightmost switch and select y: logarithmic.

The y-axis scale on the plot test3 changes from linear to logarithmic.

9. Click find curves.

curve4 is displayed on the plot test3.

10. Click return.

Using the Polyfit Math FunctionPolynomial and exponential functions can be fit to curves.

To fit a polynomial function to a curve:

1. Click edit curves panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot =.

3. Select test4.

4. Click the data entry field after x = and enter c1.x.

5. Click the data entry field after y = and enter polyfit(c1.x,c1.y,8).

Page 257: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials255

6. Click create.

Given c1, curve 5 is created which is an eighth order polynomial fit of curve c1. Curve 5 islocated on the plot test4.

Using the Vector Subrange ExtractorThe subrange function returns a vector containing the indices of the elements of a vector for aspecified subrange.

To use the subrange function:

1. Click plot = on the edit curves panel.

2. Select test5.

3. Click the data entry field after x = and enter c1.x[subrange(c1.x,.01,.04)].

4. Click the data entry field after y = and enter c1.y[subrange(c1.x,.01,.04)].

5. Click create.

Given c1, curve6 is created which is a portion of the original curve, with .01 ≤ X ≤ .04. Curve6 is located on the plot test5.

6. Click return.

Using the integrate panelThe integrate panel allows you to obtain the area under a curve and a curve’s average height. Inthis tutorial, find the area under curve1.

To find the area under a curve:

1. Click the integrate panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click plot =.

3. Pick the plot that contains curve1 and curve3.

4. Click curve = and select curve1.

5. Click the data entry field after to: x and enter 0.05.

6. Click integrate.

In the graphics area, the area under curve1 is shaded. area = displays 5.219e+08, and avgheight = displays 1.044e+10.

Page 258: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering256

7. Click return.

The simple math panelThe simple math panel allows you to apply mathematical operations to curves. In this tutorial,subtract one curve from another.

To subtract one curve from another:

1. Select the simple math panel on the xy plots module.

2. Click the switch and select sub from the pop-up menu.

3. Click plot = and select test6.

4. Click 1st curve = and select curve1.

5. Click 2nd curve = and select curve3.

6. Click execute.

A curve is created that illustrates the difference between curve1 and curve3. The curve isnamed curve7 (displayed in the target = field) and is located on plot test6.

Page 259: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials257

NASTRAN Static Analysis Using HyperMesh - HM-1010-LIn this tutorial, use the HyperMesh NASTRAN interface to create finite elements on the geometry of aplate with a hole, apply boundary conditions, and perform finite element analysis.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise andcontinue doing the exercises in the following order:

The following exercises are included:

• Defining the Model in HyperMesh

• Writing the NASTRAN Input Deck

• Viewing the Results

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Defining the Model in HyperMesh

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Double click file =.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the plate_hole.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of theplate_hole.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

Page 260: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering258

To retrieve the NASTRAN template for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the template subpanel.

3. Double click template file =.

4. Select the nastran directory.

5. Select the general template file.

6. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that template file = now displays the location of thegeneral template.

The NASTRAN general template allows you to define NASTRAN-specific attributes inHyperMesh.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To create material collectors and components:

Create your material collectors before creating your component collectors; components mustreference a material collector.

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Select the switch after collector type: and select mats.

4. Click name = and enter steel.

5. Click card image = and select MAT1.

6. Click create/edit.

The MAT1 card image is loaded for the material steel.

7. Click E to make the status title active.

NOTE A status title is displayed as yellow (off) or blue (on). The status titletoggles between the two options when you click it.

8. Click the data entry field under E and enter 2E5.

9. Click NU, click the data entry field under NU, and enter 0.30.

10. Click return.

11. Click the switch after collector type : and select comps.

12. Click name = and enter shells.

Page 261: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials259

13. Click card image = and select PSHELL.

14. Click material = and select steel.

15. Click color and select color 8.

16. Click create/edit.

HyperMesh goes to the card image panel for the new component, shells. HyperMesh assignscolor 8 to the elements that are organized into this component, and assigns the material steel tothis component.

17. Click T, click the data entry field under T, and enter 10.0.

18. Click return twice to access the main menu.

A component is created named shells. Any elements created and organized into thiscomponent have the thickness attributes defined by the PSHELL card. The elements havematerial attributes defined on the MAT1 card by the material collector steel, since the shellscomponent references this material collector.

Use the card image subpanel to modify the card images for these collectors.

Use the update subpanel to define a different material for the components.

To mesh the geometry:

The automeshing module allows you to mesh interactively on surfaces. It also includes tools formanipulating surface edges and meshing fixed points (locations where the mesher is required toplace a node). The elements generated are organized into the current component, shells.

1. Select the automesh panel on the 2-D page.

2. Select the surface displayed in the graphics area and click mesh.

3. Click using size = and enter 40.

4. Click recalc all.

5. Click mesh.

The automesher creates about 400 elements on the surface.

Page 262: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering260

Plate mesh using element size of 40mm.

6. Click return to save the mesh in the shells component.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

Applying boundary conditions to the model

In this section, the model is constrained such that two of the four edges cannot move. A total lateralload of 1000N is applied at the edge of the hole so that all forces point in the positive z-direction.

To create collectors:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols.

4. Click name = and enter spcs.

5. Click color and select color 10.

6. Click create.

The collector is created.

7. Click name = again and enter forces.

8. Click color and select color 15.

9. Click create.

The collector is created.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 263: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials261

To create constraints:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click loadcol = and select spcs.

3. Click return.

4. Select the constraints panel on the BCs page.

5. Select the create subpanel.

6. Click nodes and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.

HyperMesh goes to the Build Window panel.

7. Click interior, if not already selected.

8. Create a window around the left and right edges of the model. Do this by picking points on thescreen with your mouse.

9. Click select entities.

The nodes along the left and right edges of the model are selected (see the figure below).

HyperMesh returns to the constraints panel.

Select these nodes to apply single point constraints

10. Click dof1-dof6, if not already selected.

NOTE Dofs that are checked are constrained.

Dofs 1, 2, and 3 are x, y, and z translation degrees of freedom

Dofs 4, 5, and 6 are x, y, and z rotational degrees of freedom

11. Click create to apply these constraints to the selected nodes.

Page 264: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering262

To create forces on the nodes around the hole:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click loadcol = and select forces.

3. Click return.

4. Click return again to access the main menu.

5. Select the forces panel on the BCs page.

6. Click nodes and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.

HyperMesh goes to the Build Window panel.

7. Click interior.

8. Create a window around the hole of the model. Do this by picking points on the screen with yourmouse.

9. Click select entities.

The nodes around the hole of the model are selected (see the figure below).

HyperMesh returns to the constraints panel.

Select these nodes to create loading around hole.

10. Click nodes and select save from the extended entity selection menu.

11. Click return.

12. Select the count panel on the Tool page.

The nodes are counted automatically so that a calculation can be made to create a total force of1000N.

13. Click the upper left switch and select nodes.

Page 265: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials263

14. Click nodes and select retrieve from the extended entity select menu.

The nodes saved in the forces panel are retrieved.

15. Click selected to count the number of nodes around the hole.

16. Click return.

17. Select the forces panel on the BCs page.

18. Click nodes and select retrieve from the extended entity selection menu.

19. Click magnitude = and enter 1000.

The total load on the nodes around the hole is 1000N.

20. Click the plane and vector definition switch below magnitude = and select z-axis.

21. Click create.

22. Click return.

The last step in setting up the boundary conditions is to create a NASTRAN subcase (a loadstep in HyperMesh).

1. Select the load steps panel on the BCs page.

2. Click name = and enter lateral force.

3. Click loadcols and select spcs and forces.

4. Click select.

5. Click create.

The load step is created.

6. Click return.

To create control cards:

1. Select the cntl cards panel on the BCs page.

2. Click SOL.

3. Click the switch and select either Statics (SOL 101) or Statics & Lin. Heat Transfer (SOL 24)from the pop-up menu.

4. Click return.

5. Click PARAM.

6. Click AUTOSPC.

Page 266: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering264

7. Click return.

8. Click return again to access the main menu.

Writing the NASTRAN Input DeckIn this tutorial, write the NASTRAN input deck file, specified with the .dat extension, before runningNASTRAN.

To write your file:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the export subpanel.

3. If the nastran/general template is not specified in the template = field, click template = andselect the general template file from the nastran directory.

4. Click filename = and enter plate_hole.dat.

5. Click write.

This writes your HyperMesh database as a NASTRAN ASCII input deck.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

To save your .hm file and exit HyperMesh:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = and enter plate_hole_new.hm.

4. Click save.

5. Click return to exit the files panel.

6. Click quit to exit HyperMesh.

To add output requests to your deck:

1. Open the plate_hole.dat file in a text editor, such as WordPad.

2. After the SUBCASE 1 card, insert the following cards:

DISPLACEMENT(PUNCH)=ALL

STRESS(PUNCH)=ALL

Page 267: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials265

3. Save the changes to your file.

4. Exit the text editor and submit the job to NASTRAN for analysis.

Viewing the ResultsAfter running NASTRAN, the punch file plate_hole.pch is created. This file containsdisplacement and stress results for your linear static analysis. This section describes how to viewthose results in HyperMesh. Use the utility program hmnast to translate the .pch file into aHyperMesh results file.

To run hmnast, attach the results file and set visual options:

1. From a UNIX or MS-DOS prompt, type the following:

hmnast –d –von_max plate_hole.pch plate_hole.hmres

2. Start HyperMesh and remove any model that is currently loaded:

- Select the delete panel on the Tool page.

- Click delete model.

- Select Yes from the pop-up window.

3. Retrieve the input deck that was used to run the NASTRAN job:

- Select the files panel.

- Select the import subpanel.

- Double click translator = and select nastran.exe, located in the feinput directory.

- Double click filename = and choose plate_hole.dat.

- Click EXTERNAL.

- Click the upper toggle to no overwrite.

- Click import.

4. Set the visual options:

- Select the command subpanel.

- Double click file = and choose nastut1.cmf, located in the HyperMesh installation directory under/tutorials/hm.

- Click execute.

5. Attach the results file for post-processing:

- Select the results subpanel.

Page 268: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering266

- Double click results file = and select plate_hole.hmres, located in the directory from whichNASTRAN is run.

6. Click return to exit the files panel.

To view a deformed shape:

1. Select the deformed panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation =.

SUBCASE-1 is the only simulation. If you had created two load steps, two simulations wouldexist: SUBCASE-1 and SUBCASE-2. The subcase IDs reflect your HyperMesh load step IDs.

3. Click Subcase-1.

4. Click model units = and enter 250.

5. Click deform to view a deformed plot of your model overlaid on the original, undeformed mesh(refer to the figure below).

Isometric view of deformed plot overlaid on original undeformed mesh. Model units are set to 250.

To view a contour plot of stresses and displacements:

1. Select the contour panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation = and select Subcase-1.

3. Click data type = and select Displacements.

4. Select the view panel on the permanent menu.

5. Select top from the pop-up menu.

6. Click contour.

7. Click data type = and select von Mises Stress(max,all).

8. Click assign.

9. Click contour and compare your model to the picture below.

Page 269: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials267

von Mises stress plot using discrete contours (in performance graphics mode).

Page 270: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering268

Modeling Contact for ABAQUS - HM-1020-LThis tutorial explains how to use the interface between HyperMesh and ABAQUS. The followingexercises are included:

• Defining material properties.

• Defining properties for solid elements.

• Defining contact surfaces and interactions.

• Defining spring elements and properties.

• Creating loads and boundary conditions.

• Exporting the file to ABAQUS.

• Running hmabaqus and post processing.

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator for assistance.

Defining Material PropertiesHyperMesh supports many different material models for ABAQUS. In this example, you create thebasic *ELASTIC material model with no temperature variation. The material properties are thenassigned to the elements by the component collector.

To read in the initial model file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Double-click file = and select abaqus3_0tutorial.hm.

4. Click retrieve.

To select the ABAQUS template:

1. Select the template subpanel.

2. Double-click template file = and choose abaqus/standard.3d from the templates directory.

Page 271: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials269

To set the pre-prepared visual options:

1. Select the command subpanel.

2. Double-click file = and choose abtut1.cmf.

3. Click execute.

4. Click return to exit the panel.

To create the *ELASTIC material model card:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Create the material collector with the appropriate card image:

- Select the create subpanel.

- Click the switch after collector type and select mats.

- Click the switch under creation method: and select card image.

- Click name = and enter STEEL

- Click card image = and choose ABAQUS_MATERIAL

- Click create/edit.

3. Edit the card image to add the appropriate material model cards:

- Select ELASTIC in the option list.

- By default, the selected type is ISOTROPIC. If it is not set to ISOTROPIC, click the switch and selectit.

- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath E and enter 2.1E5.

- In the card image section of the menu, click the field beneath NU and enter 0.3

- Click return to accept the changes to the card image.

4. Click return to exit the panel.

To tie the material card to the component collectors:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the update subpanel.

3. Click the upper switch and select comps.

4. Click material = and select STEEL.

5. Double-click comps and select INDENTOR and BEAM from the list.

6. Click select to finish the selection process.

Page 272: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering270

7. Click update.

8. Select material id from the list.

9. Click update.

10. Click return to exit the panel.

Defining Properties for Solid ElementsHyperMesh supports properties for shells, solids and beams from the component collector. In thisexample, create the *SOLID SECTION property cards and tie them to the already existing componentcollectors.

To create *SOLID SECTION property cards for already existing components:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the card image subpanel.

3. Click the input collector switch and select comps.

4. Click card image = and select SOLIDSECTION.

5. Click load.

6. Select INDENTOR and BEAM from the list of components.

7. Click select to finish the selection process.

8. Click return to exit the panel.

To view the *SOLID SECTION property cards:

1. Select the card panel from the permanent menu.

2. Click the input collector switch and select comps.

3. Click comps and select INDENTOR from the list of component collectors.

4. Click select to finish the selection process.

5. Click edit to view the *SOLID SECTION property card image.

6. Click return to finish the viewing process.

7. Click return to exit the panel.

Page 273: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials271

Defining Contact Surfaces and Surface InteractionsHyperMesh supports definition of the *SURFACE DEFINITION card using sets, components, orindividual element IDs with faces. In this example, you use individual element faces to define theslave contact surface and sets to define the master contact surface. This model is made from solidelements, so you must first skin the surface with face elements, and then use those face elements todefine the contact surface.

To create face elements on solids:

1. Select the faces panel from the Tool page.

2. Click the input collector switch and choose comps.

3. Click comps and select INDENTOR from the list of components.

4. Click select to finish the selection process.

5. Click find faces.

6. Click return to exit the panel.

To view the face elements without the rest of the model:

1. Select the display panel from the permanent menu.

2. Click the upper switch and select comps.

3. Click the toggle to elems.

4. Use the right mouse button to deselect INDENTOR and BEAM .

5. Click return to exit the panel.

6. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select left from the pop-up menu.

To mask the face elements not involved in the contact surface:

1. Select the mask panel from the Tool page.

2. Select the mask subpanel.

3. Click the input collector switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.

4. Click elems and select by window from the pop-up menu.

5. Pick points on the screen to create a window like the one shown in the picture below.

Page 274: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering272

6. Click select entities.

7. Click mask .

8. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select iso 1 from the pop-up menu.

9. Click return to exit the panel.

To create the *CONTACT PAIR card:

1. Select the interfaces panel from the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter the name: CONTACT1

4. Click the switch under creation method: and click card image.

5. Click card image = and select CONTACT_PAIR.

6. Click type = and select CONTACT_PAIR.

7. Click interface color and select a color.

8. Click create.

9. Click return to exit the panel.

To define the slave *SURFACE DEFINITION using face elements:

1. Select the interfaces panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the add subpanel.

Page 275: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials273

3. Double-click name = and select CONTACT1.

4. Click the switch under slave: and select entity.

5. Click elems to the right of slave and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.

6. Click add to the right of slave: to add these faces to the *SURFACE DEFINITION.

When elements are added to a group, HyperMesh creates ghost element images that areplaced into the group. The original element that was selected is not modified.

7. Click return to exit the panel.

To tie the slave elements to the underlying solids:

1. Select the faces panel on the Tool page.

2. Click delete faces.

3. Click return to exit the panel.

To define the master *SURFACE DEFINITION using sets:

1. Select the interfaces panel from the BCs page.

2. Select the add subpanel.

3. Double-click name = and select CONTACT1.

4. Click the switch under master: and select sets.

5. Click sets and choose BEAMSURF from the list of sets.

6. Click select to finish the selection process.

7. Click update on the same line as master: to add the set to the *SURFACE DEFINITION.

8. Click return to exit the panel.

To complete the definition of the *CONTACT PAIR card:

1. Select the interfaces panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the card image subpanel.

3. Double-click name = and select CONTACT1.

4. Click edit.

5. Click the field under SLAVE in the *CONTACT PAIR card image and enter SLAVE1.

6. Click the field under MASTER in the *CONTACT PAIR card image and enter MASTER1.

Page 276: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering274

7. Select the option SmallSliding from the option list.

Notice that the parameter SMALL SLIDING now appears in the card image.

To add the *SURFACE DEFINITION and *SURFACE INTERACTION cards:

1. Click MasterSurfaceDefinition.

Note that a *SURFACE DEFINITION card now appears in the card image.

There are two ways to define the surface from a set:

- If you want to define the surface by explicitly specifying a face:

Click the selection box under MSLabel(1) and choose S1 from the pop-up menu.

Using this method requires all of the elements in the set to be aligned properly and also requiresyou to know which face is involved in the contact. Also note that ABAQUS does not allow theTRIM option to be used simultaneously with a face identifier. In order to use the TRIM option(discussed next), you must have the MSLabel(1) switch set to NoLabel.

- If you want to define the surface using the ABAQUS TRIM functionality:

Click the TRIM option under MasterSurfaceDefinition.

Click the switch under TRIM and select YES from the list.

Using this method allows ABAQUS to automatically define the master surface based on therules found in the ABAQUS User’s Manual. Also note that ABAQUS does not allow the TRIMoption to be used simultaneously with a face identifier. In order to use the TRIM option, youmust have the MSLabel(1) switch set to NoLabel.

3. Click SlaveSurfaceDefinition.

No modification of the slave *SURFACE DEFINITION card is necessary since the surface isdefined using element faces. When you export the deck to ABAQUS, a list of the element facesis written after the *SURFACE DEFINITION card.

4. Click SurfaceInteraction.

5. Select the Friction option under SurfaceInteraction to add a *FRICTION card.

6. Click the field beneath FrictionCoeff in the card image and enter 0.05

7. Click return to accept the changes to the card image.

8. Click return to exit the panel.

Page 277: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials275

Defining Spring Elements and PropertiesIn ABAQUS contact problems, it is common to use weakly grounded springs to provide stability to thesolution in the first loading step. This section explains how to create these springs and how to createthe *SPRING card.

To reset the view for further processing:

1. Select the display panel from the permanent menu.

2. Click the upper switch and select comps.

3. Click the toggle to elems.

4. Click the all button on the right side of the panel.

5. Click return to exit the panel.

6. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select iso 1 from the pop-up menu.

To create the *SPRING property card:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Create a property collector with the appropriate card image:

- Select the create subpanel.

- Click the switch after collector type and select props.

- Click name = and enter SPRING

- Click the switch under creation method: and select card image.

- Click card image = and choose SPRING.

- Click create/edit.

3. Edit the card image to add the appropriate options:

- Click the field beneath SETNAME in the card image and enter GROUNDED

- Click the field beneath dof1 in the card image and enter 3.

- The dof2 field in the *SPRING card is ignored by ABAQUS for SPRING1 elements.

- Click the field beneath Stiffness in the card image and enter 1.0E-5

- Click return to accept the changes to the card image.

4. Click return to exit the panel.

Page 278: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering276

To create a component to group the spring elements according to property:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the upper switch and select comps.

4. Click the switch under creation method: and click no card image.

5. Click name = and enter GROUNDED.

The name of this component must be the same as the name in the SETNAME field in the*SPRING property card or the elements are not tied properly to the property card.

6. Click color and select Color10.

7. Click create.

8. Click return to exit the panel.

To create the spring elements and tie them to the property:

1. Select the elem types panel on the 1D page.

2. Click mass = and select SPRING1.

In HyperMesh, grounded elements are created and stored as mass elements since they onlyhave one node in the element connectivity.

3. Click return to exit the panel.

4. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

5. Click component = and select GROUNDED from the list of component collectors.

As the spring elements are created, they are placed in this component. This component is thentied to the *SPRING card through the name: GROUNDED.

6. Click return to exit the panel.

7. Create the spring elements:

- Select the masses panel on the 1D page.

- Click property = and select SPRING from the list of property collectors.

- Click nodes and select by id from the pop-up menu.

- Type the following in the id = selection window: 451t460b3

- This shorthand selects all of the nodes from 451 to 460 in increments of 3.

- Click create.

8. Click return to exit the panel.

Page 279: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials277

Defining Loads and Boundary ConditionsIn HyperMesh, every load collector with the ABAQUS_STEP dictionary loaded creates a new *STEPin the ABAQUS deck. This model has only one loading step.

To create the *STEP load collector:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select loadcols.

4. Click name = and enter the name: STEP1.

5. Click the switch under creation method: and select card image.

6. Click card image = and choose ABAQUS_STEP.

7. Click color and choose Color 5 from the pop-up menu.

8. Click create.

9. Click return to exit the panel.

To edit the *STEP load collector:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the card image subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select loadcols.

4. Double-click name = and select STEP1 from the list of load collectors.

5. Click edit.

6. Add parameters to the *STEP card:

- Select StepParameters in the options list.

- Select Increment and Nlgeom from below StepParameters in the options list.

- Click the field beneath INCREMENT in the card image and enter 100.

7. Add the *STATIC card to the card image:

- Select Static in the options list.

You may have to use the scroll bar on the left side of the screen in the options list to find the Staticoption.

- Click the Ini_T_Inc field in the card image to change from the default value.

Page 280: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering278

- Click the field beneath Ini_T_Inc in the card image and enter 0.05

8. Add the *NODE FILE card to the card image:

- Select NodeResults in the options list.

- Select U from below NodeResults in the options list.

9. Add the *ELEMENT FILE card to the card image:

- Select ElementResults in the options list.

- Select S and SINV from below ElementResults in the options list.

10. Add the *CONTACT FILE card to the card image:

- Select ContactResults in the options list.

- Select CSTRESS from below ContactResults in the options list.

11. Add the *FILE FORMAT card to the card image:

- Select FileFormat in the options list.

- Click the switch under FILEFORMAT and select ASCII from the list.

12. Click return to accept the changes to the card image.

13. Click return to exit the panel.

To create an entity set for loading:

1. Select the entity sets panel on the BCs page.

2. Click name = and enter LOADED.

3. Click the input collector switch and select nodes.

4. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select left from the pop-up menu.

5. Click nodes and select by window from the pop-up menu.

6. Click points on the screen to create the pick window shown in the picture below.

Page 281: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials279

7. Click select entities.

8. Click create.

9. Click return to exit the panel.

To create constraints on the BEAM component:

1. Select the constraints panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Activate the check boxes next to dof1, dof2, and dof3.

4. Deactivate the check boxes next to dof4, dof5, and dof6.

5. Click nodes and select by sets from the extended entity selection menu.

6. Select ENDS from the list of entity sets.

7. Click select.

8. Click create.

9. Click return to exit the panel.

To create constraints on the INDENTOR component:

1. Select the constraints panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Activate the check boxes next to dof1, and dof2.

Page 282: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering280

4. Deactivate the check boxes next to dof3, dof4, dof5, and dof6.

5. Click nodes and select by sets from the extended entity selection menu.

6. Select LOADED.

7. Click select.

8. Click create.

9. Click return to exit the panel.

To create forces on the INDENTOR component:

1. Select the forces panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click nodes and select by sets from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Select LOADED.

5. Click select.

6. Click the upper switch and select vectors.

7. Click magnitude = and enter 10.0

8. Click the lower switch and select z-axis.

9. Click the toggle to global system.

10. Click create.

11. Click return to exit the panel.

Exporting the File to ABAQUSThe data currently stored in the database must be output to an ABAQUS .inp file for use with theABAQUS solver. The .inp file can then be used to perform the analysis using the ABAQUS outsideof HyperMesh.

To export the .inp file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the export subpanel.

3. Double-click template = and choose abaqus/standard.3d from the templates directory.

Page 283: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials281

4. Click filename = and type in a name for the input deck: job1.inp

5. Select TEMPLATE.

6. Click the toggle to all.

7. Click write.

8. Click return to exit the panel.

To save the .hm file and quit from HyperMesh:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = and type job1.hm.

4. Click save.

5. Click return to exit the panel.

6. Click quit to exit HyperMesh.

After you quit HyperMesh you can run the ABAQUS solver using the job1.inp file that was writtenfrom HyperMesh.

Running hmabaqus and Post-ProcessingAfter you have run the job using ABAQUS, the .fil file is available. In order to read the results intoHyperMesh, you must use the hmabaqus external results translator to convert the ABAQUS .fil file toa HyperMesh formatted results file. Once this is done, you can attach the results file and performpost-processing procedures.

If you ran ABAQUS and created your own .fil file, run the hmabaqus results translator to create theresults file. If you did not run the solver, you can use the abaqus3_0tutorial.res file supplied inthe Tutorial directory.

To run hmabaqus:

• At a UNIX or MS-DOS prompt, enter hmabaqus job1.fil job1.hmres.

To import the hm file, attach the results file, and set visual options:

1. If you have a model loaded into HyperMesh, follow these procedures:

- Select the delete panel from the Tool page.

- Click delete model.

Page 284: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering282

- Answer Yes in the pop-up window.

2. Select the files panel.

3. Read the input deck that was used to run the ABAQUS job or the input deck supplied in thetutorials directory:

- Select the import subpanel.

- Double-click translator = and choose abaqus from the feinput directory.

- Double-click filename = and choose job1.inp, if you ran your own solver program andabaqus3_0tutorial.inp, if you want to use the supplied file.

- Select EXTERNAL.

- Click the upper toggle to no overwrite.

- Click import.

4. Set the pre-prepared visual options:

- Select the command subpanel.

- Double-click file = and choose abtut2.cmf from the tutorials directory.

- Click execute.

- If you are using the x version of HyperMesh, an error message may be displayed. Select continue inthe pop-up menu.

5. Assign the results file for post-processing:

- Select the results subpanel.

- Double-click results file = and choose job1.hmres if you ran your own solver program andabaqus3_0tutorial.res if you want to use the supplied file.

6. Click return to exit the panel.

To post-process displacement and stress results:

1. Select the contour panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation = and select: step 1 inc 7, t=1.00e+00

Notice that each increment in the ABAQUS analysis is a new simulation.

3. Click data type = and select Displacements.

4. Click the leftmost switch and select model units from the pop-up menu.

5. Click model units = and enter 10.0

6. Click contour.

7. Click data type = and select Von Mises.

Page 285: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials283

8. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select restore 1 from the pop-up menu.

9. Click assign.

The default location for ABAQUS to output stress values is at the Integration Points. Thehmabaqus program takes these values and averages them to the centroid of each element.Therefore, the most accurate representation of the stress values as they were reported fromABAQUS can be found with an assigned plot.

10. Click return to exit the panel.

To post-process incremental results:

1. Select the transient panel on the Post page.

2. Click start with = and select step 1 inc 1, t=5.00e-02.

3. Click end with = and select step 1 inc 7, t=1.00e+00.

4. Click data type = and select Von Mises.

5. Click scale factor = and enter 100.0.

If you are using the x-version, skip to Step 12.

6. Click transient.

HyperMesh calculates seven frames of animation showing the displacement and von Misesstress for each increment. In a non-linear analysis, this type of animation is necessary to viewthe history of the stress development.

7. Once the animation begins, click the leftmost toggle to visual options.

8. Click the toggle next to mode and select hidden line.

9. Click the toggle next to color and select contour.

10. Click exit to exit the animation.

11. Activate the hidden line option.

12. Click transient.

HyperMesh calculates seven frames of animation showing the displacement and von Misesstress for each increment. In a non-linear analysis, this type of animation is necessary to viewthe history of the stress development.

13. Click exit to exit the animation.

14. Click return to exit the panel.

Page 286: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering284

To set up the display for post-processing contact results:

1. Select the display panel from the permanent menu.

2. Click the input collector switch and select comps.

3. Click the toggle to elems.

4. Click none.

5. Click return to exit the panel.

6. Select the view panel from the permanent menu and select iso 1 from the pop-up menu.The elements displayed on the screen are the slave elements that are involved in the contact. Toview the contact results, the underlying element faces must be visible. The following steps showall of the elements connected to these slave element faces.

7. Select the find panel on the Tool page.

8. Select the find attached subpanel.

9. Click the upper switch and select elems.

10. Click the switch under attached to: and select elems.

11. Click elems under attached to: and select displayed from the extended entity selection menu.

12. Click find.

13. Click return to exit the panel.

To post-process contact results:

1. Select the contour panel on the Post page.

2. Click simulation = and select: step 1 inc 7, t=1.00e+00

Notice that each increment in the ABAQUS analysis is a new simulation.

3. Click data type = and select Contact Pressure.

4. Click the second switch down, which should be set to model units, and choose undeformedfrom the pop-up menu.

5. Click contour.At this point, an error message is displayed in the message bar that states:

Some node results were not found (ignored).

When ABAQUS reports contact results, it only reports values for the nodes directly on the slavesurface. Therefore, the nodes on the other end of the displayed solid elements don’t have anycontact results reported from ABAQUS. HyperMesh recognizes that there are no values at thosenodes and reports an error message to warn you that they may be missing results. Also noticethat the contact pressure is high on the corners of the slave surface, but is zero in the middlewhere no contact is occurring.

Page 287: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials285

Stress Analysis using ANSYS - HM-1030This tutorial demonstrates how to use the HyperMesh ANSYS interface for stress analysis.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise andcontinue doing the exercises in the following order:

The following exercises are included:

• Updating Elements

• Defining Element Properties

• Updating Load Types

• Exporting a HyperMesh Database File to ANSYS

• Translating Results in ANSYS

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

A Description of the ModelA compressor wheel with blades is modeled as a plane stress problem with two planes of symmetry.The blades are connected to the wheel using dovetail joints. The wheel and dovetail joints aremodeled using plane42 elements. The region of contact between the dovetail and the wheel slot ismodeled using point-to-point gap elements. The blades are modeled using lumped mass elementsconnected to the dovetail joint with link elements. The loading is centrifugal (angular velocity of 3600rpm). The gap elements make this a non-linear analysis.

Page 288: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering286

Updating ElementsIn this tutorial, make the existing element types ANSYS-compatible elements.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Double click file =.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash, /.

4. Select the hm-ansys.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the hm-ansys.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to exit the files panel.

To select the ANSYS template:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Double click template file =.

3. Select the ansys.2d template from the \ansys\ directory.

4. Click return.

To update elements:

1. Select the elem types panel on the 2-D page.

2. Click mass = and select MASS21.

3. Click rod = and select LINK1.

4. Click gap = and select CONTAC12.

5. Click tria3 = and select PLANE42.

6. Click quad4 = and select PLANE42.

7. Click elems and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

8. Click update.

Page 289: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials287

9. Click return.

Defining Element PropertiesIn this tutorial, define element properties based on the ANSYS template.

To define plane element properties:

1. Select the card panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the input collector switch and select comps.

3. Click comps again and select WHEEL and DOVETAIL.

4. Click select.

5. Click card image = and select ETR42.

6. Click edit.

HyperMesh goes to the card image panel.

7. Select kopt3_FLAG.

8. Click the data entry field under kopt3 and enter 0.

9. Click return.

HyperMesh returns to the card panel.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

To define options for mass, gap, and link elements:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the card image subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps.

4. Double click name = and select MASS.

5. Click card image = and select ETR21.

6. Click load/edit.

HyperMesh goes to the card image panel.

7. Select kopt3_FLAG.

8. Click the data entry field under kopt3 and enter 4.

Page 290: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering288

9. Click return.

HyperMesh returns to the collectors panel.

10. Double click name = and select GAP.

11. Click card image = and select ETR12.

12. Click load/edit.

HyperMesh goes to the card image panel.

13. Select kopt1_FLAG.

14. Click the data entry field under kopt1 and enter 0.

15. Select kopt2_FLAG.

16. Click the data entry field under kopt2 and enter 1.

17. Select kopt4_FLAG.

18. Click the data entry field under kopt4 and enter 0.

19. Click return.

HyperMesh returns to the collectors panel.

20. Double click name = and select LINK.

21. Click card image = and select ETR1.

22. Click load/edit.

HyperMesh goes to the card image panel.

23. Click return.

HyperMesh returns to the collectors panel.

24. Click return to access the main menu.

To create a property collector for mass elements:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select props.

4. Click name = and enter MASS.

5. Click card image = and select ETR1D21 from the pop-up menu.

6. Click material = and select mat.

Page 291: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials289

7. Click create/edit.

HyperMesh goes to the card image panel.

8. Click R_LEN = and enter 1.

9. Click the data entry field under R and enter 100 for the mass of the MASS elements.

10. Click return.

HyperMesh returns to the collectors panel.

11. Click return to access the main menu.

To create a property collector for gap elements:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter GAP.

4. Click card image = and select ETR1D12.

5. Click material = and select mat.

6. Click create/edit.

HyperMesh goes to the card image panel.

7. Click R_LEN = and enter 4.

8. Click the data entry field under R and enter 0. Use the TAB key to enter the following values inthe remaining data entry fields: 2 E 05, 0, and 0.

9. Click return.

HyperMesh returns to the collectors panel.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

To create a property collector for link elements:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter LINK.

4. Click card image = and select ETR1D1.

5. Click material = and select mat.

Page 292: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering290

6. Click create/edit.

HyperMesh goes to the card image panel.

7. Click R_LEN = and enter 1.

8. Click the data entry field under R and enter 10 for the cross sectional area of the link elements.

9. Click return.

HyperMesh returns to the collectors panel.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

After creating property collectors, assign them to their respective element types.

To update mass element properties:

1. Select the masses panel on the 1-D page.

2. Select the update subpanel.

3. Click elems and select by config from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click config = and select mass from the extended entity selection menu.

5. Click select entities.

6. Click property = and select MASS.

7. Click update.

8. Select property.

9. Click update.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

To update the gap element properties:

1. Select the gaps panel on the 1-D page.

2. Select the update subpanel.

3. Click elems and select by config from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click config = and select gap from the extended entity selection menu.

5. Click select entities.

6. Click property = and select GAP.

Page 293: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials291

7. Click update.

8. Select property.

9. Click update.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

To update the rod elements:

1. Select the rods panel on the 1-D page.

2. Select the update subpanel.

3. Click elems and select by config from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click config = and select rod from the extended entity selection menu.

5. Click select entities.

6. Click property = and select LINK.

7. Click update.

8. Click return.

Updating Load TypesIn this tutorial, make the existing load types ANSYS compatible.

1. Select the load types panel on the BCs page.

2. Click constraint = and select D_CONSTRNT.

3. Click loads and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click update.

5. Click return.

Exporting a HyperMesh Database File to ANSYSIn this tutorial, edit your HyperMesh database file and export it to ANSYS.

To write the ANSYS .prp file:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

Page 294: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering292

2. Select the export subpanel.

3. Click filename = and enter hm-ansys.prp.

4. Click write.

5. Click return.

6. Click quit to end the HyperMesh session.

You do not need to save the HyperMesh file.

To edit the ANSYS file:

You must edit the hm-ansys.prp file since HyperMesh does not translate the application of angularvelocity to ANSYS.

1. Open the hm-ansys.prp file in a text editor.

2. Before the /SOLU command, insert the following command:

OMEGA,,,10

(3600 rpm ˜ 10 rad/s)

3. Save the file and exit.

You can now submit the hm-ansys.prp file to ANSYS for analysis.

Page 295: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials293

Translating Results in ANSYSThe ANSYS analysis performed on the hm-ansys.prp file generated a file named hm-ansys.rst.hmansys translates this ANSYS binary file into a HyperMesh binary results file using the commandline utility hmansys.exe. You can then use the HyperMesh binary results file, hm-ansys.hmres,for post-processing.

To generate the file hm-ansys.hmres:

1. Enter the following syntax in UNIX or at the MS-DOS prompt:

../hm/results/hmansys/hmansys [options] hm-ansys.rst hm-ansys.hmres.

The hm-ansys.hmres file can be used for post-processing.

2. To obtain the list of options, use the following syntax:

../hm/results/hmansys/hmansys.exe –u.

3. To specify the HyperMesh results file, click results file = on the global panel and select hm-ansys.hmres.

Page 296: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering294

General Interfacing with Crash Analysis Solvers -HM-1100This tutorial explains how to interface with crash analysis codes. New procedures include penetrationand time step checks and joint creation.

The following exercises are included:

• Checking for penetration

•Fixing penetrations (2 methods)

• Creating joints.

• Checking the minimum time step.

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Checking for PenetrationThe penetration panel is used to check contact interfaces for nodal penetrations. It allows you todetermine how much penetration is occurring and to correct the penetration by moving anypenetrating nodes.

The penetration panel supports all of the solver interfaces that contain card images and interfaceelements. Before you use the penetration panel, element thicknesses and contact interfaces mustbe defined for the current template loaded in the global panel. For more information on definingthickness on collector cards, refer to the collectors panel in the Panels section of the on-line help.For more information about creating contact interfaces, see the interfaces panel in the on-line help.

Page 297: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials295

The penetration panel calculates penetration based on the following formula:

Ta/2 + Tb/2 - d = P

Where Ta and Tb are element and/or nodal thicknesses, d is the distance between the elementmidplanes, and P is the amount of penetration. HyperMesh computes the penetration check on anode by node basis, which allows the penetration, P, to vary throughout the model. Nodes withnegative penetration values are marked as non-penetrating nodes.

Contact directions (interface element normals) are not considered when determining if nodes arepenetrating the opposing contact face. Nodes are marked as failed regardless of the direction normalto the contact elements. However, the calculated penetration does consider the normal direction.This is discussed in more detail in the Fixing Penetrations section.

There are some limitations for penetration checking:

Page 298: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering296

Two known penetration checking limitations

• Nodes that penetrate far enough through the thickness of the opposing surface so that thethicknesses do not overlap at the nodal location (left diagram in above figure).

• Nodes that lie exactly normal to nodes on the opposing contact surface (right diagram in abovefigure). Some of the nodes in the right diagram will be detected, however some of nodes willnot be detected.

To retrieve the pene_dyna.hm file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

4. Select the pene_dyna.hm file.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return.

To specify the dyna.key template:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the template subpanel.

3. Click template file = twice.

4. Select the ls-dyna/dyna.key file.

5. Click return.

Page 299: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials297

To check for penetrations:

1. Select the penetration panel on the Tool page.

2. Click groups and select S2S_regular.

3. Click select.

The minimum distance between the two surfaces of elements in this group is 3.00 and thethickness of each component is 9.00.

4. Click check.

All of the nodes that fail the penetration check are marked as temporary nodes and thepenetration adjustment panel is displayed.

Fixing PenetrationsAfter a penetration check is completed, the penetration check adjustment subpanel is displayed.

NOTE The penetration check adjustment panel can only be accessed after completing apenetration check in the penetration panel.

The thickness value you enter in the penetration check adjustment subpanel specifies the elementthickness adjustment required to eliminate the penetration. The value in the thickness number fieldcan be set to scale or reduction. When you click recheck, it recalculates the penetration by eitherscaling or by reducing the element thickness by the specified value. The amount of penetrationcalculated when you use the recheck function is based on the following formulas:

for scale:

scale * (Ta/2 + Tb/2) – d = P

for reduction:

(Ta/2 + Tb/2) – d – reduction = P

The display mode can be set to temp nodes, vectors, or contour. The temp nodes mode displaysyellow temporary nodes at all node locations that failed the penetration check. The vectors modedisplays vectors in the direction and magnitude required to fix each penetrating node. You canalternate the vector display between uniform size or magnitude %. The contour mode displays acontour plot from zero to the maximum penetration.

The save penetrated option allows you to save the location of the penetration areas as well as themagnitude and direction of the vectors required to fix the penetration areas. The saved entities can

Page 300: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering298

be used in other HyperMesh panels to fix the penetration (see exercise two). The save penetratedfunction creates a ^vectors collector that contains the saved vectors. The ^vectors collector canbe turned on and off by using the display panel.

The adjust function allows you to quickly fix penetrations by moving only the nodes that failed thepenetration check. When you click adjust, the penetrated nodes move in the direction andmagnitude of the vectors in the vectors display mode. Additional use of the adjust functioncontinues to translate the nodes in the same direction and magnitude. You must use this functionwith discretion because the adjust function deforms the original model at the points of penetration(shown in the next exercise).

After the adjust function has been applied, you can:

• Use reject to undo any modifications and remain in the penetration check adjustment panel

• Use abort to undo any modifications and return to the penetration panel

• Use return to accept the modifications and return to the penetration panel

The penetration checking calculation does not take into account the direction of the contact normals.Nodes are marked as failed regardless of the direction the contact normals are pointing. However,the computed direction and magnitude of the penetration does take into account the direction of thecontact normals. When the segment orientation option is on, the penetration check takes intoconsideration the directions of contact normals when it calculates the amount of penetration (firstillustration below). The returned values represent the actual nodal penetration. When the segmentorientation option is off (second figure below), the penetration check does not take into account thedirections of element normals. Instead, the check calculates the amount of penetration as theshortest distance required to move nodes so they do not lie within the region defined as the elementthicknesses. The returned values are the mathematical absolute amount of nodal penetration. It isrecommended that you leave the segment orientation option active unless all the vectors in thevector display mode are pointing in the opposite direction needed to fix the penetration.

Segment orientation on with contact normals reversed

Page 301: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials299

Segment orientation off with contact normals reversed

Once the amount of penetration is determined, the value is used to calculate the vector directions andmagnitudes required to fix the penetrating nodes. Surface to Surface and Single Surface contactscreate vector magnitudes equal to P/2 (the total penetration divided by 2). Node to Surface contactsdefine vector magnitudes equal to P because only slave nodes are adjusted.

One method you can use to fix penetration areas is to use the translate panel to move the elementsthe distance necessary to correct the penentration.

To correct penetration areas:

1. Click the switch under display mode and select vectors.

2. Activate the label vector check box.

3. Click the toggle under vectors and select uniform size.

4. Click uniform size = and enter 50.000 to make the vectors easier to view.

The vectors show the direction and magnitude required to fix the penetrations. The calculatedvalue for P is 6.00, so moving each surface in this surface to surface contact by P/2=3.00, willfix the penetration problem.

5. Click the switch under save penetrated and select nodes & vect.

Page 302: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering300

6. Click save penetrated to place the failed nodes in the user mark and to create vectors at all thefailed nodes. The vectors are placed in a ^vector collector that can be turned on and off in thedisplay panel. The vectors are created in the direction and magnitude required to fix thepenetration.

7. Click return.

8. Select the translate panel on the Tool page.

9. Select all the elements in the fl1 component:

- Click the input collector switch and select elems.

- Click elems and select by comp.

- Select the fl1 component.

- Click select.

10. Click the plane and vector collector switch and select vector.

11. Pick one of the vectors that point in the positive x direction.

12. Click magnitude = and enter 3.000

13. Click translate +.

14. Click reset to clear the selected entities.

15. Select all of the elements in the fl2, light blue component.

- Click the input collector switch and select elems.

- Click elems and select by comp.

- Select the fl2 component.

- Click select.

16. Click translate -

17. Click return.

To delete the ^vector collector:

1. Select the delete panel on the Tool page.

2. Click the input collector switch and select vectorcols.

3. Click vectorcols.

4. Select ^vector.

5. Click select.

6. Click delete.

Page 303: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials301

Another method you can use to fix penetration areas is to use the adjust function in thepenetration check adjustment panel.

To fix penetration areas by using adjust:

1. Select the penetration panel on the Tools page.

2. Click groups.

3. Select the NS_reverse group.

4. Click select.

5. Click check.

6. Click the switch under displayed mode and select contour.

7. Click view in the permanent menu and select iso 1.

8. Pick one element on the screen to see the nodal penetration values associated to that element.

9. Click the left mouse button to turn off the penetration value display.

10. Click the switch under displayed mode and select vectors.

11. Click magnitude % = and enter 2000.

12. Click view in the permanent menu and select top.

Notice that the lengths of the vectors are dependent on the amount of penetration and arepointing in the wrong direction.

13. Deactivate the segment orientation check box.

HyperMesh ignores which direction is normal to the contact.

14. Click adjust.

Page 304: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering302

NOTE The adjust function is an easy way to fix penetrations. However, using theadjust function deforms your model at the areas of penetration, as isapparent when this exercise is complete.

The pene-dyna.hm file contains other model components that may beuseful for trying the penetration checking/adjusting functions. Theseexamples are not included in the tutorial but are available for more practice.Use the display panel to view the other collectors in the model.

Creating JointsJoint definitions are created in the joints panel on the 1D page. HyperMesh 3.0 supports thefollowing standard joint types: Spherical, Revolute, Cylindrical, Planar, Universal, Translational, andLocking. All of these types are stored as joint elements in the HyperMesh database. HyperMeshalso supports LS-DYNA3D’s *CONSTRAINED_JOINT_STIFFNESS_OPTION (Card 38) property todefine friction, damping, stop angles, etc. The LS-DYNA3D solver interface supports the creation ofjoints in the joints panel. The PAMCRASH solver interface currently supports the creation of jointsas rod elements (see the PAMCRASH tutorial).

NOTE A spherical joint consists of two coincident nodes. During analysis, the twocoincident nodes are forced to remain coincident but the bodies attached toeach coincident node are allowed to rotate freely about the joint location.

To retrieve the joints.hm file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

4. Select the joints.hm file.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return.

To load the dyna.key template:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the template subpanel.

3. Click template file = twice.

4. Select the ls-dyna/dyna.key file.

5. Click return.

Page 305: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials303

To activate coincident node picking:

1. Select the options panel in the permanent menu.

2. Select the modeling subpanel.

3. Activate the coincident node picking check box.

To change the display:

1. Select the display panel in the permanent menu.

2. Select the blue torus, orange torus, and New Joint collectors.

3. Deactivate any other collectors.

4. Click return.

To create a spherical joint:

1. Select the joints panel on the 1D page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch under joint type and select spherical.

4. Left click once on a node in the center of both tori to bring up the coincident node picking window(see figure below).

There are two nodes in the window, node 598 and node 1.

5. While holding down the left mouse button, drag the cursor over the node labeled 598.

The blue rigid body attached to this node is highlighted.

6. Release the left mouse button to select node 598.

7. Repeat the last three steps, but select node 1 from the coincident node picking window instead

Page 306: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering304

of node 598.

8. Click create to generate the spherical joint element.

NOTE A revolute joint consists of four nodes, two sets of two coincident nodes.During analysis, all four of the revolute joint ’s nodes remain at the samelocation with respect to each other. The bodies attached to the nodes arefree to rotate about the axis that lies along the length of the revolute joint.

To change the display:

1. Select the display panel in the permanent menu.

2. Select the bearing, shaft, bearing rigids, shaft rigids, and New Joint collectors.

3. Deactivate the other collectors.

4. Click return.

To create a revolute joint:

1. Zoom in on one end of the shaft assembly (see figure below).

2. Click the switch under joint type and select revolute.

3. Left click once on a node at the center of one of the rigid link elements to bring up the coincidentnode picking window (see figure below).

4. Select a node attached to a blue rigid link element.

If you depress the left mouse button while your cursor is over a node in the coincident nodepicking window, the element attached to that node is highlighted.

5. Click at the same node location again and select the node attached to the orange rigid linkelement.

6. Repeat the previous three steps on the opposing pair of blue and orange rigid link elements (seefigure below).

7. Click create.

Page 307: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials305

Checking the Minimum Time StepThe time subpanel in the check elems panel calculates element time steps, based on the FEAsolver, and allows you to check for time steps that fall below a specified value. The ability to check forthe minimum time step is a new feature.

To retrieve the pene_dyna.hm file:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

4. Select the pene_dyna.hm file.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return.

To specify the dyna.key template:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the template subpanel.

3. Click template file = twice.

4. Select the ls-dyna/dyna.key file.

5. Click return.

To check the time steps:

1. Select the check elements panel on the Tool page.

2. Select the time subpanel.

3. Click check elems.

Page 308: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering306

LS-DYNA3D Interface - HM-1110-LThis tutorial explains how to use the HyperMesh interface with LS-DYNA3D.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start with the first exercise andcontinue doing the exercises in the following order:

• Load a pre-defined HyperMesh file

• Select the LS-DYNA3D template

• Create Control Cards for LS-DYNA3D

• Assign Element Types for LS-DYNA3D

• Define Materials with Components for LS-DYNA3D

• Define a HyperMesh Group: Sliding Interface for LS-DYNA3D

• Define a Rigid Wall for LS-DYNA3D

• Creating Boundary Conditions for LS-DYNA3D

• Create Time Histories for LS-DYNA3D

• Create a Cross Section for LS-DYNA3D

• Exporting a LS-DYNA3D data deck from HM

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Load a Pre-defined HyperMesh FileIn this section, retrieve the model, rail-dyna.hm.

To retrieve a HyperMesh binary database:

1. Select the files panel.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Double-click file = and select rail-dyna.hm.

4. Click retrieve.

5. Click return.

Page 309: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials307

Select the LS-DYNA3D TemplateTo use HyperMesh with a special solver, the template of this solver has to be loaded. This template"knows" how to transform the binary HyperMesh database into a solver input deck. LS-DYNA3D hasthree templates. The dyna.key supports the Keyword input format, the template dyna.seq supportsthe sequential input format of LS-DYNA3D, and dyna.lrg supports the large format which is also asequential input format.

To load the LS-DYNA3D template:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click template file = and select ls-dyna/dyna.lrg.

3. Click return.

Page 310: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering308

Create Control Cards for LS-DYNA3DThis section explains how to create the control card of the CONTROL SECTION.

NOTE The settings of the control cards influence the default values for definingmaterials.

To define the Title Card:

1. Select the cntl cards panel on the BCs page.

2. Click Title Card and enter the title string, “This is my first LS-DYNA example.”

3. Click return.

To define the Control Cards:

1. Click Termination.

2. Click the data entry field under endtim and enter 10.

3. Click return.

4. Click TAURUS.

5. Click the data entry field under the output intervall, PLTC, and enter 1.

6. Click return.

7. Click ASCII out I.

8. Enter values for SECFORC, RWFORC, NODOUT, GLSTAT and MATSUM :

- Click the text.

- Click the data entry field that appears under the text.

- Enter .1

This sets the output intervall for cross-section-, rigid-wall, nodal time history-, global statistic-and material output.

9. Click return.

10. Click return.

Define MaterialsNOTE The material collector is used in the LS-DYNA3D interface. In contrast to

Page 311: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials309

PAM-CRASH, LS-DYNA3D has separate material and cross sectiondefinitions. Once materials and cross sections are defined, they can becombined in different property definitions. The property collects the crosssection and material data for a certain number of elements. Elements andproperty are connected with the property ID in the element cards.

To define a Material Type 24 (Piecewise Linear Plasticity):

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select mats.

4. Click name = and enter steel.

5. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.

6. Click card image = and choose MATL24.

The template provides different material dictionaries. It supplies not only materials for shells andbricks, but also materials for discrete elements like springs. To switch the material type, use thecard previewer.

7. Click create/edit.

8. Click the data entry field under RHO and enter 7.85e-6.

9. Click the data entry field under Comment and enter This is the side material.

10. Click the data entry field under E and enter 210 (in kN/mm2).

11. Click the data entry field under NU and enter 0.3.

If necessary, use the arrow buttons on the left side to scroll the screen.

12. Click SIGY, click the data entry field, and enter 0.37 to define the yield stress .

13. Click the button under array count and select 3.

This means that we are defining a stress-strain curve with 3 points.

14. Type the following pairs for strain (in EPS(i)) and stress (in ES(i)) : (0.0; 0.37), (0.02; 0.39), (0.04;0.45).

15. Click return.

16. Click return.

To define a second steel Material Type 24 using loadcurves for the nonlinear behavior:

It is necessary to define the loadcurve first. After it is defined, it is possible to choose this loadcurve inthe material definition instead of using the method described in the first section.

Page 312: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering310

1. Select the Post page.

2. Select the xy plots panel.

3. Select the plots panel.

4. Click plot = and enter Materialdata.

5. Click create plot.

6. Click return.

To create a curve:

1. Select the edit curves panel.

2. Click plot = and select Materialdata.

3. Select the math option instead of file.

4. Click x= and enter {0.0, 0.02, 0.04} (including the brackets) as the value for the plastic strain.

5. Click y= and enter {0.37, 0.39, 0.45} (including the brackets) as the value for the effective stress.

6. Click create.

7. Click return.

8. Click exit.

NOTE Once a loadcurve is defined, it can be used for the stress-strain behavior of amaterial, as a load vs. time function, force-deflection function, or others.

To create and edit a material collector:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select mats.

4. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.

5. Click name = and enter steel2.

6. Click card image = and select MATL24.

7. Click create/edit.

8. Click Rho, click the data entry field, and enter 7.85e-6.

9. Click the data entry box under Comments and enter “This is the second definition.”

Page 313: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials311

10. Click the data entry field under E and enter 210 (in kN/mm2).

11. Click the data entry field under NU and enter 0.3.

If necessary, use the arrow buttons on the left side to scroll the screen.

12. Click the data entry field under SIGY and enter 0.37 to define the yield stress .

13. Double-click LCSS and pick curve1.

14. Double-click LCSR and pick curve1.

15. Click return.

16. Click return again.

Definition of Cross Section Properties for LS-DYNA3DThe cross section definition in LS-DYNA3D contains the element thickness, integration rule, andelement type. There are different types of cross sections; for example, shell section and beamsection.

Page 314: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering312

The tutorial model has different thicknesses for the elements on the top and bottom and on the sides.Therefore, you must create 2 cross section properties.

To define the first cross section property:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select props.

4. Click name = and enter side_prop.

5. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.

6. Click card image and select SectShll.

7. Click material = and select steel.

8. Click create/edit.

9. Enter a comment for that property; for example, “Property of side elements.”

10. Select NIP, click the data entry field, and enter 3. (This is the number of integration pointsthrough the thickness.)

11. Click the data entry field under T1 and enter 1 (shell thickness).

12. Click return twice.

To define the second cross section property:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select props.

4. Click name = and enter top_prop.

5. Click card image and select SectShll.

6. Click material = and select steel2.

7. Click create/edit.

8. Click the data entry field under comment and enter Property of elements on the topand bottom of the rail.

9. Click NIP, click the data entry field, and enter 3 for the number of integration points through thethickness.

10. Click the data entry field below T1 and enter 2.5 (shell thickness).

Page 315: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials313

11. Click return twice.

To create a new collector :

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select comps.

4. Click name = and enter topbottom.

5. Click card image = and select Part.

6. Click material = and select steel.

7. Click color and select color13.

8. Click create/edit.

9. Double-click SID and select top_props.

10. Click the data entry field under Comment and enter Elements on top and bottom of therail.

The number below ELFORM should be the same as in the ShellSectionProperty definition,which is depicted below the comment. If it is not, change the value.

11. Click return.

12. Click return.

In the next steps, combine the elements with material and cross section data.

To reorganize the elements:

1. Select the organize panel.

2. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

3. Click elems to access the extended entity selection menu.

4. Select by comps.

5. Select the tmp component.

6. Click select.

7. Click destination = topbottom.

8. Click move.

Page 316: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering314

All elements that were previously in the tmp component are moved to the topbottomcomponent.

9. Click return.

10. Select the delete panel on the Tool page.

11. Click the input collector switch and select comps.

12. Click comps and select the tmp component.

13. Click return.

14. Click delete.

The tmp component is deleted.

15. Click return.

To add a material and a ShellSection property to the side component:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the card image subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type and select comps.

4. Double-click name = and select side.

5. Click card image and select Part.

6. Click load/edit.

7. Double-click SID and select side_prop.

8. Click in the area below Comment and enter Elements on the side of the rail.

9. Note that the value below ELFORM is the same as the value for ELFORM in the Shell sectionproperty (in this case in the property component side).

10. Click return.

11. Click return.

Define a HyperMesh Group: Sliding Interface for LS-DYNA3DThis section describes how to define a sliding interface of type13. This is a single surface contact.There are several methods you may use to select the contact elements. You can define a box thatencloses all the elements you want included in the contact definition or select the elements bycomponent, set, or entity.

Page 317: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials315

In this section, define a multiple self-impacting contact of type 13.

To define the group:

1. Select the interfaces panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter self_impact.

4. Click type = and select SingleSurface.

5. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.

6. Click card image = and select SingleSurface.

7. Click interface color and select color 5.

8. Click create/edit.

9. Click the switch below options and select Automatic.

The contact type in the card previewer window changes to 13.

10. Click return.

To add the slave components:

1. Select the add subpanel.

2. Click the switch under slave and select comps.

You can specify the contact members by their component ID.

3. Click comps and select the components side and topbottom.

4. Click select.

5. Click return.

6. Click update.

7. Click return.

In this section, define a master slave (element - node) contact of type 5.

To define the group:

1. Select the interfaces panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

Page 318: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering316

3. Click name = and enter masterslave.

4. Click type = and select NodesToSurface.

5. Click card image = and select NodesToSurface.

6. Click create/edit.

7. Click the switch under Options and select Automatic.

8. Click return.

To add the master elements and slave nodes:

1. Select the add subpanel.

2. Click the switch under master and select entity.

3. Click the switch under slave and select entity.

4. Click elems and pick two arbitrary elements.

5. Click the upper add.

6. Click nodes and pick two arbitrary nodes.

7. Click the lower add.

8. Click return.

Define a Rigid Wall for LS-DYNA3DIn this section, create a rigid wall of type 4 with an infinite plate as the base node(-1.00,0.0,0.00116).

To create a node as base node for the rigid wall:

1. Select the create nodes panel on the Geom page.

2. Select the type in subpanel.

3. Set x = -1.0, y = 0.0, and z = 0.00116.

4. Click create node.

5. Click return.

To create and define a rigid wall card:

Page 319: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials317

1. Select the rigid walls panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter rwall1.

4. Click type = and select RWPlanar.

5. Click the switch under creation method and select card image.

6. Click card image = and select RWPlanar.

7. Click rgdwall color and select color 12.

8. Click size = and enter 100.

This controls only the size of the displayed Rigid Wall on the screen.

9. Click create/edit.

To define the rigid wall type:

1. Click in the data entry field under FRIC and enter 0.3 for the friction coefficient.

2. Click return.

To define rigid wall geometry:

1. Select the geom subpanel.

2. Click name = and select rwall1.

3. Select the switch after shape and select plane.

4. Click the toggle to infinite.

5. Click the switch under normal vector and choose x-axis.

6. Click base node, and then pick the node you just created in the graphics area.

You may need to click f in the permanent menu to see the node.

7. Click update to create the rigid wall geometry.

To add slave nodes for rigid wall:

1. Select the add subpanel.

2. Click the switch under slaves and select nodes.

3. Click nodes and select by id.

Page 320: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering318

4. Enter 1-21 after id = and press the ENTER key on the keyboard.

5. Delete the previous selection and enter node 1012 as input and press the ENTER key on thekeyboard.

6. Click add.

To add a motion to the rigid wall:

1. Select the motion subpanel.

2. Click the switch and select components.

3. Click x comp = and give 2000.0 as value.

4. Click the switch under type of motion and select velocity.

5. Click update.

To define attributes in the card previewer:

1. Select the card subpanel.

2. Click edit.

3. Click the data field under mass and enter 1.

4. Make sure that the IMSWF is switched off; then the velocity is defined as initial velocity and youare able to specify the mass of the stonewall.

5. Click return.

6. Click return.

NOTE The card previewer of the rigid wall changed accordingly to the definitions beenmade. If the IMSWF is switched on in HyperMesh you can define the stonewallmovement with a loadcurve.

Creating Boundary Conditions for LS-DYNA3DThis exercise will show how to create boundary conditions to the model.

To create a load collector:

1. Select the collectors panel.

2. Select the create subpanel.

Page 321: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials319

3. Click the switch after collector type and select loadcols.

4. Click name = and enter bounc.

5. Click color and select color15.

6. Click create.

7. Click return.

To specify the load type:

1. Select the load types panel on the BCs page.

2. Click constraint = and choose BoundSPC.

All constraints that are now created will be displacement boundary conditions.

3. Click return.

To create constraints on nodes:

1. Turn off the display of groups:

- Click display on the permanent menu.

- Click the upper switch and select groups.

- Click none.

- Click return.

2. Select the constraints panel on the BC’s page.

3. Select the create subpanel.

4. Double-click nodes and select by id.

5. Enter 990-1011 as the node numbers.

6. Press ENTER on the keyboard.

7. Click create.

The constraints are now added to all nodes.

8. Click return.

Create Time Histories for LS-DYNA3DFor LS-DYNA3D, time histories for nodes and elements are available. For this exercise, you

Page 322: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering320

create time histories for both. The method is the same for any type of time history you create.

To create a node time history card:

1. Turn off display of loads:

- Click the display panel from the permanent menu.

- Choose the switch next to groups and select loadcols.

- Click none.

- Click return to access the main menu.

2. Select the output block panel from the BC’s page.

3. Click name = and enter nodeth.

4. Make sure that nodes is the entity type, if not, use the toggle button to switch.

5. With your mouse, select a few nodes in the graphics area.

6. Click create.

The Time History for nodes is now created.

To create an element time history card:

1. Click name = and enter elemth.

2. Click the input collector switch and select elems.

3. Pick a few elements in the graphics area.

4. Click create.

To review time histories entities:

1. Click review.

2. Select elemth.

The entities associated with this time history are now highlighted.

3. Click return to access the main menu.

To create a node time history card:

1. Click card on the permanent menu.

2. Click the switch and select outputblocks.

Page 323: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials321

3. Click elemth.

4. Click select.

5. Click edit.

The time history card is displayed as it will look in the output.

6. Click return.

7. Click return.

Cross Section Definition for LS-DYNA3D

To create a set of elements that consists of the elements which should belong to the crosssection:

1. Select entity sets menu on page BCs

2. Make sure that elems is depicted in the yellow area, if not use the toggle button to switch.

3. Click name= and enter cross_ele.

4. Select the elements which describe the cross section.

5. Click return.

To create the cross section.

1. Select the interfaces on page BCs.

2. Select the create menu.

3. Click name = and enter cross-sect1.

4. Click type = and select CrossSection.

5. Click card image and select CrossSection also.

6. Click create.

7. Select the add menu.

8. Use the toggle button below master: to select the selection type sets.

9. Click sets in the yellow area and select cross_ele.

10. Click select.

11. Click return.

Page 324: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering322

12. Click update.

13. Make sure that the selection type for the slaves is entity.

14. Click nodes and select the nodes with the mouse which describe the section.

15. Click add.

16. Click return.

Exporting a LS-DYNA3D Data Deck from HyperMeshThe exercise explains how to generate a LS-DYNA3D input deck from HyperMesh.

To export a LS-DYNA3D file:

1. Select files from the main menu.

2. Select the export sub-panel.

3. Make sure that the template = field still shows the dyna.lrg file.

4. Click filename = once, and enter the name of the LS-DYNA3D file you will create: rail.bdf

5. Click write.

HyperMesh writes the deck, and it displays a message once it is complete.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 325: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials323

PAM-CRASH Interface - HM-1120LThis tutorial introduces the HyperMesh interface to PAM-CRASH. The HyperMesh PAM-CRASHinput translator supports the PAM-CRASH 97 cards and most PAM-CRASH 98 cards.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start withthe first exercise and continue doing the exercises in the following order:

• Load a Prepared HyperMesh File

• Select the PAM-CRASH Template

• Create Control Cards

• Assign Element Types

• Define Materials with Component Dictionaries

• Define HyperMesh Groups: Sliding Interface

• Define a Rigid Wall

• Creating Boundary Conditions

• Create Time Histories

• Creating a Function

• Creating a Sensor Card

• Exporting a PAM-CRASH Data Deck from HyperMesh

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Load a Prepared HyperMesh FileA prepared model with elements and nodes is included in the /tutorials/hm/ directory. The filename of the example is rail.hm. This is the basic example on which the tutorial is based.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

Page 326: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering324

4. Select the rail.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of the rail.hmfile.

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Select the PAM-CRASH TemplateTo use HyperMesh with a specific solver, the solver template must be loaded. This templatespecifies how HyperMesh writes a solver input deck. PAM-CRASH has only one template.

To load the PAM-CRASH general template:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click template file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

3. Select the general template, located in the HyperMesh installation directory under/pamcrash/general/.

HyperMesh returns to the global panel. Note that template file = now displays the location ofthe general template.

4. Click return to access the main menu.

Create Control Cards for PAM-CRASHThis tutorial explains how to create the control card for the CONTROL SECTION of the PAM-CRASH

Page 327: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials325

input deck.

NOTE The settings of the control cards influence the default values for definingmaterials. No PAM-CRASH deck can be executed without error if the controlcard CTRL is undefined.

To define the title card:

1. Select the cntl cards panel on the BC’s page.

2. Click Title and enter This is my first PAM-CRASH example.

3. Click return.

To define the control card:

1. Click Control.

2. Below TIME, enter the value 0.06.

3. Below TIOD, enter the value 0.005.

4. Below PIOD, enter the value 0.005.

5. Click the box below MORE and select 1 from the pop-up menu.

6. Click return.

To define the file optional keyword:

1. Click File Name.

2. Below FILENAME, enter rail.

3. Click return.

To define the time step optional keyword:

1. Click next.

2. Click Time Step.

3. Click the switch below Shell Criteria and select LARGE from the pop-up menu.

4. Click the switch below Thickness Term and select BEND from the pop-up menu.

5. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Page 328: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering326

Assign Element Types for PAM-CRASHHyperMesh allows you to specify how different element types are defined in the solver deck. Forexample, a quad4 can be a SHELL or a MEMBR element. The tria3 element can be a TRIA_C,SHELL, or MEMBR element. The tetra4, the penta6, and the hexa8 elements define the SOLIDelements of PAM-CRASH.

To assign the element type:

1. Select the elem types panel on the 1-D page.

2. Click quad4 = and select SHELL from the pop-up menu.

3. Click elems and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Click update.

5. Click return to access the main menu.

To edit the SHELL card properties in the card previewer:

1. Select the card panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the upper left switch and select elems from the extended entity selection menu.

3. Click config = and select quad4 from the pop-up menu.

4. Click type = and select SHELL from the pop-up menu.

5. Select any displayed element and click edit.

The SHELL card now appears in the card previewer. The number of integration points throughthe thickness NINT and the optional thickness T are defined here. If no thickness is entered,the thickness of the material defined in the component is used.

6. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Page 329: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials327

Define Materials with Component Dictionaries forPAM-CRASHEach PAM-CRASH material card MAT or MATER requires one component.

NOTE The material collector is not used in the PAM-CRASH interface. PAM-CRASH does not differentiate between material data and cross section dataas other solvers do. Consequently, elements have no reference to materials,which only belong to a component. The material definition for the elements isincluded with this component.

Elements are located in a component (beam, bar, joint, shell). The template takes the component IDas material ID. The card image type of the collector defines the material as 1-D material, 2-Dmaterial, or 3-D material.

To define a Material Type 102 for collector side:

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the card image subpanel.

3. Click the switch and select comps from the pop-up window.

4. Click name = twice and select side.

5. Click card image = and select MAT_2D from the pop-up menu.

NOTE The template provides MAT_1D, MAT_2D, and MAT_3D dictionaries.Material types from 200 to 230 are defined with MAT_1D. Materials typesfrom 100 to 151 are defined with MAT_2D. Material types from 1 to 41 aredefined with MAT_3D. To switch the material type, use the card previewer.

6. Click load/edit.

7. Click the switch below Material Type and select Type 102 from the pop-up menu.

NOTE Only the materials of the current dictionary (1-D, 2-D, 3-D) can be selected.The ID of the material is given by HyperMesh with the component ID.

8. Below density, enter the value 7.85e-9.

NOTE You can use the TAB or SHIFT TAB key on the keyboard to go to the next orprevious edit field.

9. Below TITLE, enter This is the side material.

10. Below E, enter the value 20000.

11. Below Yield, enter the value 250.

12. Below v, enter the value 0.3.

13. Below t, enter the value 2.

Page 330: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering328

14. Click return.

To define a Material Type 102 for collector topbottom:

1. Select the create subpanel.

2. Click name = and enter topbottom.

3. Click the switch below creation method: and select same as from the pop-up menu.

4. Click same as = and select side.

5. Click color and select Color 10 from the pop-up menu.

6. Click create/edit.

All attributes of the card image from the side material are automatically copied into the currentcomponent.

7. Below t, enter the value 2.5.

8. Below Title, enter This is the topbottom material.

9. Select LARGE_FMT.

NOTE The card previewer of the components allows you to change between theMAT and the large material format MATER.

Page 331: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials329

10. Click return twice to access the main menu.

NOTE The created component topbottom now is empty. We will now move theelements of the component tmp into the component topbottom.

To reorganize the elements:

1. Select the organize panel on any main menu page.

2. Click the switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.

3. Click elems and select by comps from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Select tmp.

5. Click select.

6. Click destination = and select topbottom.

7. Click move.

All elements of the component tmp are moved to the component topbottom. Note that thecolor of the elements has changed from orange to green.

8. Click return.

To delete the component tmp:

1. Select the delete panel on the Tool page.

2. Click the switch and select comps from the extended entity selection menu.

3. Click comps and select tmp.

4. Click return.

5. Click delete.

The component tmp is now deleted.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 332: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering330

Define HyperMesh Groups: Sliding Interface forPAM-CRASHThis tutorial describes how to define a self contacting sliding interface (type 26). A second interfaceis defined only for tutorial purposes.

The procedure below explains how to define a type 26 self contacting sliding interface.

To define the group:

1. Select the interfaces panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter self_impact.

4. Click type = and select SLINT26 from the pop-up menu.

Note that the card image is updated simultaneously.

NOTE It is possible to define various types of sliding interfaces. All of them, exceptthe SLIN42, are written as a SLINT / card. The SLINT42 type is written asthe PAM 98 SLINT2/ card.

5. Click interface color and select Color 6.

6. Click create/edit.

7. Below SLFACM, enter the value 1.0.

8. Select Comment.

9. Below Comment, enter This is the selfimpact interface.

10. Click return.

To add the slave components:

1. Select the add subpanel.

2. Click name = twice and select self_impact.

3. Click the switch below slave: and select comps from the pop-up menu.

4. Click comps twice and select side and topbottom.

5. Click return.

6. Click update.

If update is not clicked, no changes to the previous definition are made. No changes are madeto the graphics window, because the master and slave component list is not displayed.

Page 333: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials331

NOTE If you edit this interface with the card previewer, the master and slave set andcomponent definition are not shown; however, they are still defined in theadd subpanel.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

The procedure below explains how to define a type 34 master slave (element - node) contact.

To define the group:

1. Select the interfaces panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter masterslave.

4. Click type = and select SLINT34 from the pop-up menu.

Note that the card image is updated simultaneously.

5. Click interface color and select Color 13.

6. Click create/edit.

7. Below SLFACM , enter the value 1.0.

8. Click return.

To add the master elements and slave nodes:

1. Select the add subpanel.

NOTE The add subpanel now appears with different options. The template specifieswhat group type is available with the different interfaces, such as SLINT26 orwith SLINT34. Possibilities are: (1) master and slave elements, (2) masterelements and slave nodes, (3) slave elements, and (4) slave nodes.

2. Click the switch below master: and select entity from the pop-up menu.

3. Click the switch below slave: and select entity from the pop-up menu.

4. After master:, click elems to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.

5. Select two elements on the model.

6. Click the upper right add.

7. After slave:, click nodes to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.

8. Select two nodes on the model.

Page 334: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering332

9. Click the lower right add.

10. Click return to access the main menu.

You should now see the master elements (elements with x) and the slave nodes (S) displayedon the model.

Define a Rigid Wall for PAM-CRASHThis tutorial explains how to define a type 4 infinite rigid wall with a base node at -1.00, 0.0, 0.00116.

To create a base node for the rigid wall:

1. Select the create nodes panel on the Geom page.

2. Select the type in subpanel.

3. After X =, enter the value –1.0.

Page 335: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials333

4. After Y =, enter the value 0.0.

5. After Z =, enter the value 0.00116.

6. Click create node.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To create and define the rigid wall card:

1. Select the rigid walls panel on the BCs page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter rwall1.

4. Click type = and select RIGWA from the pop-up menu.

NOTE You can switch between the PAM 97 RIGWA and the PAM 98 RWALL cardby choosing different types: RIGWA or RWALL.

5. Click rgdwall color and select Color 12.

6. Click size = and enter the value 100.

This specifies the display size of the rigid wall.

7. Click create.

To define rigid wall geometry:

1. Select the geom subpanel.

2. Click name = twice and select rwall1.

3. Click the switch after shape = and select plane from the pop-up menu.

4. Click the toggle after shape = and select infinite.

5. Click the switch below normal vector: and select x-axis from the pop-up menu.

6. Click base node to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.

7. Select the created node in the graphics area.

You may need to click f on the permanent menu to see the node.

8. Click update.

The rigid wall is now shown in the graphics area.

To add slave nodes for the rigid wall:

Page 336: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering334

1. Select the add subpanel.

2. Click the switch below slaves: and choose nodes from the pop-up menu.

3. Click nodes twice and select by id from the extended entity selection menu.

4. Enter the value 1-21.

Note that 21 nodes at the interface of the rail and the rigid wall are highlighted. Also note thatone of the nodes was not selected.

5. Click the node that was not highlighted.

or

Enter the value 1012 in the by id field.

6. Click add.

The selected nodes are now set as slaves.

Page 337: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials335

To add motion to the rigid wall:

1. Select the motion subpanel.

2. Click the switch below name = and select components from the pop-up menu.

3. Click x comp = and enter the value 1.0.

4. Click the switch below type of motion: and select velocity from the pop-up menu.

5. Click update.

Page 338: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering336

To define attributes in the card previewer:

1. Select the card panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the switch and select groups from the extended entity selection menu.

3. Click groups and select rwall1.

4. Click return.

5. Click edit.

6. Click the switch below Friction Coefficient and select no sliding from the pop-up menu.

7. Click the switch below Rigid Wall Descriptor – Plane Type and select Type 4 from the pop-upmenu.

NOTE The card previewer of the rigid wall changed according to the definitionsmade. Now it is possible to define the mass and the initial velocity for movingrigid wall with finite mass.

8. Below Mass, enter the value 1.

9. Below Vinit, enter the value 2000.0.

10. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Page 339: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials337

Creating Boundary Conditions for PAM-CRASHThis tutorial explains how to create model boundary conditions.

To create a load collector:

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.

4. Click name = and enter bounc.

5. Click the switch below creation method: and select card image from the pop-up menu.

The card image field should be blank.

6. Click color and select Color 15 from the pop-up menu.

7. Click create.

The header bar now displays bounc as the current loadcol.

8. Click return to access the main menu.

To specify the load type:

1. Select the load types panel from the BCs page.

2. Click constraint = and choose BOUNC from the pop-up menu.

All constraints that are now created will be displacement boundary conditions.

3. Click return to access the main menu.

To create constraints on nodes:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu

2. Click the upper right switch and select groups from the pop-up menu.

3. Click none.

The display of groups is now off.

4. Click return to access the main menu.

5. Select the constraints panel from the BCs page.

Page 340: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering338

6. Select the create subpanel.

7. Click nodes and select by id from the pop-up menu.

8. Enter the value 990-1011.

9. Click size = and enter the value 10.

10. Click create.

The constraints are now added to the nodes.

11. Click return to access the main menu.

Create Time Histories for PAM-CRASHFor PAM-CRASH, time histories may be defined for nodes, elements, and local coordinate systems.For this exercise, you will only create time histories for some nodes and elements. The operation isthe same for any type of time history that is created.

Page 341: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials339

To create a node time history card:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu

2. Click the upper right switch and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.

3. Click none.

The display of loads is now off.

4. Click return.

5. Select the output block panel from the BCs page.

6. Click name = and enter node_thp.

7. Click the switch and select nodes from the pop-up menu.

8. Use the mouse to select a few nodes in the graphics area.

9. Click create.

The time history for nodes is now created.

To create an element time history card:

1. Click name = and enter elem_thp.

2. Click the switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.

3. Use the mouse to select a few elements in the graphics area.

4. Click create.

To review time histories entities:

1. Click review.

2. Select elem_thp.

The entities associated with this time history are highlighted.

3. Click return to access the main menu.

To view the time history card image:

1. Select the card panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the switch and select outputblocks from the pop-up menu.

3. Click outputblocks.

Page 342: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering340

4. Select elem_thp.

5. Click return.

6. Click edit.

The time history card is displayed as it will look in the output.

7. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Create a FunctionThis section describes how to generate curves, which corresponds to the function cards FUNCT andLOCUR in PAM-CRASH. This curve should serve as a function for a logical sensor switching on andoff. At time=0, the sensor is on, at time=0.01 the sensor is switched off.

To create a curve:

1. Select the xy plots panel from the Post page.

2. Click plots.

3. Click plot = and enter sensor.

4. Click create plot.

5. Click return.

6. Click edit curves.

7. Select the create subpanel.

8. Click plot = and select sensor.

9. Select math.

10. After x =, enter {0, 0.01, 0.1}.

11. After y =, enter {1, 0, 0}.

12. Click create.

13. Click return.

Page 343: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials341

14. Click exit to access the main menu.

Create a Sensor CardSensors are implemented as properties in HyperMesh. In this example we refer to the curve definedin the preceding Help topic.

To define a PAM-CRASH sensor:

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select props from the pop-up menu.

4. Click name = and enter sensor.

5. Click the switch below creation method: and select card image from the pop-up menu.

6. Click card image = and select SENSOR from the pop-up menu.

7. Click create/edit.

8. Below ISENS, enter 1.

NOTE The sensor ids cannot be automatically handled by HyperMesh itself. Type inthe ids as integer labels and refer to them from other entities with this integer.These values are not updated automatically by renumbering entities.

9. Select COMMENT.

10. Below Comment, enter This is a logical function sensor.

11. Click the switch below Sensor type and select logical function switch from the pop-up menu.

12. Click LCS twice and select curve1.

13. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Page 344: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering342

Exporting a PAM-CRASH Data Deck fromHyperMeshThis tutorial explains how to generate a PAM-CRASH input deck from HyperMesh.

To export a PAM-CRASH file:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the export subpanel.

The template = field must show the pamcrash/general file.

3. Click filename = and enter rail.pc.

rail.pc is the PAM-CRASH file you will create.

4. Click write.

HM writes the deck. A message in the header bar will indicate when the process is completed.

5. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 345: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials343

RADIOSS Interface - HM -1130-LThis tutorial introduces the use of the RADIOSS 3.1 template when creating models for crashanalyses.

Since each procedure builds on the preceding section, you should start withthe first exercise and continue doing the exercises in the following order:

• Creating and Defining Components, Materials and Properties

• Creating and Defining Interface Elements for RADIOSS

• Create and Define a Rigid Wall Entity

• Creating Boundary Conditions for RADIOSS

• Creating Time Histories for RADIOSS

• Creating and Editing Control Cards for RADIOSS

• Exporting a RADIOSS Data Deck from HM

All files referenced in the HyperMesh tutorials are located in the HyperWorks installation directoryunder /tutorials/hm/.

If you do not know the location of the HyperWorks installation directory, contact your systemsadministrator.

Creating and Defining Components, Materials, andPropertiesWhen starting a new model, typically you need to organize a model by components, material, andproperty data. This tutorial demonstrates how to organize a model by defining RADIOSS materialand property cards and also shows how those can be associated with components.

A prepared model with elements and nodes is included in the /tutorials/hm/ directory. The filename of the example is rail_crash.hm. This is the basic example on which the tutorial is based.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the rail_crash.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of therail_crash.hm file.

Page 346: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering344

5. Click retrieve.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

rail_crash.hm.

To load the RADIOSS template:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click template file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

3. Select the radioss31.fix template, located in the HyperMesh installation directory under/radioss/radioss31.fix/.

HyperMesh returns to the global panel. Note that template file = now displays the location ofthe radioss31.fix template.

4. Click return to access the main menu.

To define material data:

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the card image subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select mats from the pop-up menu.

4. Click name = twice and select steel.

5. Click card image = and select MLAW2 from the pop-up menu.

Page 347: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials345

This is the RADIOSS material.

6. Click load/edit.

7. Below Title, enter steel.

8. Below RHO_1, enter the value 7.8e-06.

This is the density.

9. Below E, enter the value 2e5.

This is the Young’s modulus.

10. Below nu, enter the value .3.

This is the Poissons’ ratio.

The material properties are now edited.

11. Click return to access the collectors panel.

The material data is now defined.

Material card – RADIOSS MLAW2.

To create and define property data:

1. Select the create subpanel.

2. Click the switch after collector type: and select props from the pop-up menu.

3. Click name = and enter rail_prop.

4. Click the switch below creation method: and select card image from the pop-up menu.

5. Click card image = and select SectSHEL from the pop-up menu.

The RADIOSS property is now selected.

NOTE It is not necessary to specify material in this panel when using the RADIOSStemplate.

6. Click create/edit.

7. Below Title, enter rail property.

8. Below Thick, enter the value 1.0.

Page 348: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering346

The property data is now defined.

9. Click return to access the collectors panel.

Property card – RADIOSS SectSHEL.

To define components:

1. Select the card image subpanel.

2. Click the switch after collector type: and select comps from the pop-up menu.

3. Click name = twice and select rail.

4. Click card image = and select Part from the pop-up menu.

5. Click load/edit.

NOTE Although not a RADIOSS card, this allows you to control which property isassociated with a component. RADIOSS does not have a component conceptsuch as HyperMesh, so this “card” was created to bridge the gap. This card willnot be output, but element data associated with this component will reflect theMATNUM (material ID) and IPID (property ID) shown here.

6. Click IPID twice and select rail_prop.

This selects the property that was created and defined earlier.

7. Click return twice to access the main menu.

The component data is now defined.

Component card for RADIOSS.

Page 349: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials347

Creating and Defining Interface Elements forRADIOSSThis tutorial shows how to create interface elements that define the RADIOSS interface cards.Interface elements are for defining where contact or possible contact can occur on a model.

To create and define interface entities:

1. Select the interfaces panel on the BC’s page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click name = and enter int1.

This is a name for the interface.

4. Click type = and select ELEMtoELEM from the pop-up menu.

5. Click interface color and select Color 9 from the pop-up menu.

6. Click create/edit.

7. Click the box below Itype and select 7 from the pop-up menu.

This defines RADIOSS interface type 7. You may also enter in other values pertaining to thisinterface, but this example uses the default values.

NOTE HyperMesh currently only allows surface input types 1 or 5 for RADIOSS.

Interface card – RADIOSS ELEMtoELEM.

8. Click return to access the interfaces panel.

We will now add master elements to the model.

9. Select the add subpanel.

10. Click name = twice and select int1.

11. Click the switch below master and select entity from the pop-up menu.

Page 350: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering348

NOTE For the RADIOSS template, only entity, sets, or all are valid for elementdefinitions.

12. Click the upper elems box and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

You can also select elements individually or with any other option on the extended entityselection menu.

13. Click the upper right add.

Master interface elements are created on each structure element.

We will now add slave elements to the model.

14. Click the switch below slave and select entity from the pop-up menu.

15. Click the lower elems box twice and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

16. Click the lower right add.

Slave interface elements are created on each structure element.

NOTE Slave and master elements are added to all structure elements in order to definethe model for self contact.

17. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 351: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials349

Slave and master interface elements.

Create and Define a Rigid Wall EntityThis tutorial demonstrates how to create and define a rigid wall entity for RADIOSS.

To create and define a rigid wall:

1. Select the rigid walls panel on the BC’s page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

We will now create and define the rigid wall card.

3. Click name = and enter rwall1.

4. Click type = and select RigidWall from the pop-up menu.

5. Click rgdwall color and select Color 13 from the pop-up menu.

Page 352: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering350

6. Click size = and enter the value 100.

This controls the size of the displayed rigid wall on the screen when it is created.

7. Click create.

The rigid wall group is now created.

We will now define the rigid wall geometry.

8. Select the geom subpanel.

9. Ensure that rwall1 is displayed after name =.

10. Click the upper right switch and select plane from the pop-up menu.

11. Click the toggle and select infinite.

12. Click the switch below normal vector: and select x-axis from the pop-up menu.

13. Press F8 on the keyboard to select the create nodes panel.

14. Create a node at (900,0,0).

15. Click return to access the rigid walls panel.

16. Click base node to highlight the box with the blue input cursor.

17. Select the created node in the graphics area.

You may need to click f on the permanent menu to see the node.

18. Click update.

The rigid wall geometry is now created.

We will now add slave nodes for the rigid wall.

19. Select the add subpanel.

20. Click the switch below slaves and select nodes from the pop-up menu.

NOTE Only nodes, sets, or all are supported for the RADIOSS template.

21. Click the yellow nodes box twice and select all from the extended entity selection menu.

22. Click add.

We will now edit the RADIOSS rigid wall card.

Page 353: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials351

Rigid wall.

23. Select the card subpanel.

24. Ensure rwall1 is displayed after name =.

25. Ensure that RigidWall is displayed after card image =.

26. Click edit.

27. Below Xm, enter the value 900.

28. Below Ym, enter the value 0.0.

Page 354: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering352

29. Below Zm, enter the value 0.0.

These are the coordinates of the base point that was used to create the rigid wall.

30. Below Xm1, enter the value 901.

31. Below Ym1, enter the value 0.0.

32. Below Zm1, enter the value 0.0.

The above values are the direction of the normal.

33. Click return twice to access the main menu.

RADIOSS rigid wall card.

Creating Boundary Conditions for RADIOSSThis tutorial shows how to create boundary conditions on the model.

To create a load collector:

1. Select the collectors panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the create subpanel.

3. Click the switch after collector type: and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.

4. Click name = and enter load1.

5. Click color and select Color5 from the pop-up menu.

6. Click create.

NOTE There are no card images associated with loadcols for the RADIOSS template.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 355: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials353

To specify the load type:

1. Select the load types panel on the BC’s page.

2. Click velocity = and select PrcrcbVel from the pop-up menu.

All velocities now created are initial velocities.

Load types panel.

NOTE PrcrcbVel is prescribed velocity.

3. Click return to access the main menu.

To create velocities on nodes:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the upper right switch and select groups from the pop-up menu.

3. Click none.

The display of groups is now turned off.

4. Click return to access the main menu.

5. Select the velocities panel on the BC’s page.

6. Select the create subpanel.

7. Click view on the permanent menu and select left.

The left side of the model is displayed.

8. Click nodes and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.

9. Use the mouse to draw a window around the nodes on the far left end of the rail.

10. Click select entities.

11. Click magnitude = and enter the value 1000.

12. Click the lower left switch and select x-axis from the pop-up menu.

Page 356: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering354

13. Click create.

The velocity is now added to all nodes.

14. Click return to access the main menu.

Velocities on end of rail.

Create Time Histories for RADIOSSFor RADIOSS, time histories for nodes, elements, skew frames, interfaces, and materials aresupported. For this tutorial, you will only create time histories for some nodes and elements.Operation is the same for any type of time history that is created.

To create a node time history card:

1. Select the display panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the upper right switch and select loadcols from the pop-up menu.

3. Click none.

The display of loads is now off.

Page 357: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials355

4. Click return to access the main menu.

5. Select the output block panel on the BC’s page.

6. Click name = and enter nodeth.

7. Use the mouse to select a few nodes in the graphics area.

8. Click create.

The time history for nodes is now created.

To create an element time history card:

1. Click name = and enter elemth.

2. Click the switch and select elems from the pop-up menu.

3. Use the mouse to select a few elements in the graphics area.

4. Click create.

To review time histories entities:

1. Click review.

2. Select elemth.

The entities associated with this time history are now highlighted.

3. Click return to access the main menu.

To view a time history card image:

1. Select the card panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click the switch and select outputblocks from the pop-up menu.

3. Click outputblocks.

4. Select elemth.

5. Click select.

6. Click edit.

The time history card is now displayed as it will look in the output.

7. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Page 358: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering356

RADIOSS element time history card.

Creating and Editing Control Cards for RADIOSSFor RADIOSS, some control cards are generated automatically, such as CARD 2.7 – NUMBER OFELEMENTS, so it may not be necessary for you to view every control card. This tutorial only shows acouple of control cards in order to describe the procedure.

To view and edit a control card:

1. Select the cntl cards panel on the BC’s page.

RADIOSS control cards.

2. Click HeaderCard.

3. Below RUNAME, enter a name for the file.

4. Click return.

Repeat this procedure for any other cards you wish to update.

RADIOSS header card.

To reset a control card:

Page 359: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials357

1. Click delete.

2. Select the control card you want to reset.

The card changes colors from green to grey.

To suppress control card data from being written:

1. Click disable.

2. Select the control card you wish to suppress.

The color changes from green to red.

To reactivate the control card:

1. Click enable.

2. Select the card you want to restore.

The color changes from red back to green.

To define a control card in order to export a RADIOSS file:

1. Click TimeHistory_1.

2. Click return twice to access the main menu.

Exporting a RADIOSS Data Deck from HyperMeshThis tutorial explains how to generate a RADIOSS input deck from HyperMesh.

To export a RADIOSS file:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the export subpanel.

3. Ensure that template = shows radioss31.fix.

4. Click filename = and enter the name of the RADIOSS file you want to create.

5. Click write.

HyperMesh writes the deck, and displays a message when it is complete.

6. Click return to access the main menu.

Page 360: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering358

File export.

Page 361: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials359

Fatigue Panel - HM-1140This tutorial demonstrates how to write an input file for a given fatigue solver using the optionsavailable on the fatigue panel.

The following exercise is included:

• Using the fatigue panel to export data and write an nSOFT input deck

Using the Fatigue Panel to Export Data and Write annSOFT Input DeckIn this tutorial, retrieve the file keyhole.hm. This file contains a finite element (FE) model -forwhich an analysis has already been conducted- to obtain the stress/strain information for durabilityloads of interest.

To retrieve the file for this tutorial:

1. Select the files panel on any main menu page.

2. Select the hm file subpanel.

3. Click file = twice.

HyperMesh displays a list of the files and subdirectories in the current directory. Directorynames are followed by a slash.

4. Select the keyhole.hm file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

5. HyperMesh returns to the files panel. Note that file = now displays the location of thekeyhole.hm file.

6. Click retrieve.

7. Click return to access the main menu.

To load the results file:

1. Select the global panel on the permanent menu.

2. Click results file = twice.

3. Select the keyhole.res file, located in the HyperWorks installation directory under/tutorials/hm/.

4. Click return.

To export data and write a fatigue solver input deck:

Page 362: Hypermesh tutorials

HyperMesh Tutorials Altair Engineering360

1. Select the fatigue panel on the Post page.

2. Click the upper left toggle and select linear statics.

Results contained in keyhole.res were obtained from linear statics analysis.

NOTE Select the transient dynamic option if a dynamic finite element analysis wasused to obtain the stress/strain results for the model.

3. Click the lower left toggle and select ascii.

NOTE Select the binary option if the fatigue solver allows a binary input file.

For more information on fatigue solvers and acceptable input file formats,please see the fatigue panel in the Panels On-line Help.

4. Click output file = and enter a name for the output file.

This file becomes the input file for the fatigue solver.

5. Click data group = and select any of the data groups that you want to write to the output file.

The data groups are organized based on whether nodal or elemental results are available in theresults file.

NOTE For more information on how HyperMesh organizes the analysis resultsavailable in the results file, please see the fatigue panel in the Panels On-lineHelp.

6. Click the switch under select simulation: and select all.

This specifies the data in the results file that is written to the output file. In this case, selectingall writes the stress/strain data for the selected nodes or elements for all loadcases representedin keyhole.res.

NOTE For a linear static analysis, you can write out stress/strain information from oneor all of the simulations.

For a transient dynamic analysis, you can write out stress/strain informationfor one or all of the time steps, or you can choose a range from the starting timestep to the ending time step.

For more information, see the fatigue panel in the Panels On-line Help.

The next step is to select the entities for which the finite element analysis results file is written.

Page 363: Hypermesh tutorials

Altair Engineering HyperMesh Tutorials361

NOTE The type of entity you select is based upon the data group you selected. Selectnodes if the data group you selected refers to nodal results. Similarly, selectelements if the data group you selected refers to elemental results. If the datagroup results and the entity type are not the same, HyperMesh displays an errormessage, “Results file doesn’t contain nodal values”.

7. Click the entity input collector switch and select elems.

8. Click elems and select by window from the extended entity selection menu.

9. Draw the window as shown in the figure below.

10. Click interior.

11. Click select entities.

12. Click write.

An ascii file is written to your directory.

You can read this file into the appropriate fatigue solver to complete the fatigue analysis.